JP6575051B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Some of such gaming machine, it is shall with the aim of enjoyment enhanced by the by that the effect operation in operating the variable member.

JP 2008-012194 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a risk that it is difficult to set appropriately the operation of the variable member.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can be preferably set the operation of the variable member.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a variable member that can be changed, variable means for changing the variable member, and a predetermined operation in which the variable member has a predetermined operation based on power-on. The first variable control means for variably controlling the variable means so as to perform the turning-on operation, the determination means capable of determining the position of the variable member, and the determination result of the determination means in advance when the power is turned on Based on the determination result corresponding to a position not included in the predetermined specific range, the variable member is changed in the direction toward the specific range before the predetermined closing operation is performed. The second variable control means for variably controlling the means to be within the specific range, and the determination result of the determination means when turning on the power is the determination result corresponding to the position included in the specific range. Based on , Before performing said predetermined closing operation, the third variable control means for varying to a predetermined position within the specified range by the variable member said varying means variably controls the direction toward the outside of the specific range And comprising.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the variable member, that is visibly configured to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the variable member that can be changed, the variable means that changes the variable member, and the variable member performs a predetermined input operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on. A first variable control means for variably controlling the variable means, a determination means capable of determining the position of the variable member, and a determination result of the determination means included in a predetermined specific range when power is turned on nOT based on it became to the determination result corresponding to the position, before performing said predetermined closing operation, said varying means in a direction in which the variable member is directed in the specific range by varying control said second variable control means for variably to a certain range, based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means when the power is turned on is turned determination result corresponding to the position included in the specific range, the input of the predetermined Action Uyori before, and a third variable control means for varying to a predetermined position within the specified range by the variable member said varying means variably controls the direction toward the outside of the specific range.

Thereby, there exists an effect that operation | movement of a variable member can be set suitably.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit in the state where the 2nd slide operation unit was attached to the back case. It is a front view of the operation | movement unit in the state which the standing support object moved to the overhanging position. It is a front view of the operation | movement unit in the state which the tilting accessory act | operated to the overhanging position. It is a front view of an operation unit in the state where each slide accessory moved to the extended position. It is a front view of an operation unit in the state where each slide combination and tilting combination moved to the overhang position. It is a front view of an operation unit in the state where each slide combination and standing combination moved to the overhang position, respectively. It is a front view of an operation unit in the state where each slide combination and center swing combination moved to the extended position, respectively. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the main control apparatus, (b) showed typically the correspondence of the 1st type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second per random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the operation start condition table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the load reference value table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the power supply return operation | movement table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the accessory operation | movement setting table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. (A), (b) is the figure which illustrated the content of the accessory composite reach production. It is the figure which illustrated the content of the alternative production of a combination thing reach production. (A), (b) is the figure which illustrated the content of the opening effect. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of LED current at the time of employ | adopting a current dimming system in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is an LED at the time of employ | adopting PWM dimming system in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the time change of an electric current. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement stop process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the backlight control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation | movement unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the operation | movement unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the hemispherical accessory in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory in 3rd Embodiment, (c) is 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the hemispherical accessory in. (A)-(d) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(d) is a side view of the light-shielding sensor provided in the hemispherical accessory in 3rd Embodiment, and a light-shielding plate. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the positional relationship of the light shielding sensor and light shielding plate in 3rd Embodiment, and the output of a light shielding sensor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the operation | movement start condition table in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the load reference value table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the power supply return operation | movement table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory lighting control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory lighting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory opening / closing process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the operation start condition table in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the load reference value table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the power supply return operation | movement table in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the content of the power supply return operation | movement for every accessory in the modification of 1st Embodiment. . It is a figure which shows the accessory operation | movement setting table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the operation start setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the stepping motor typically, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the excitation table typically, and the correspondence with the state of an excitation counter and a stepping motor typically It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the priority table in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is the priority in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the example of another table typically. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the adjustment control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the control timing of the backlight for LCD in the modification of 2nd Embodiment, and the motor for accessories, (b) is the LCD back in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of control of light. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the operation | movement start condition table in the modification of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the content of the origin return operation | movement table in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical object return process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the origin position setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the nail | claw-shaped accessory return process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the half-moon type | mold return process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 14) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 228 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 228 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 228 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 228 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 228 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and the others are (Not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal The entrance 67 is configured by assembling the variable display device unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are processed by the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 14) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37a, 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are displayed in accordance with each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. . Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistic, time-shortening, or normal, by a lighting state, and whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a probabilistic jackpot (big hit A) and a short time jackpot (big hit B) are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “probable jackpot” is a probable jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 16 rounds, and the “short-time jackpot” is a jackpot of 16 rounds, While shifting to the low-probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a short-time state.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability has been increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, transition to the special gaming state (jackpot). It is a game state that is easy to play. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of hitting is not changing, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that during probability changing. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state and the normal symbol (second symbol) has a higher probability of hitting to the second entrance 640. A game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (a state where neither the special symbol jackpot probability nor the normal symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the normal symbol hit probability is increased, but also the time that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and a longer time than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 in comparison with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 has a third winning entry (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 as a trigger while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display units 37a and 37b. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying symbols in a variable manner, and an LED for variably displaying the second symbol with the passage of a sphere at the normal entrance 67 as a trigger. The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 14). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit B”, the variable display in which the main symbols to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added is arranged. Further, if “big hit A”, a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are added are arranged. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Each time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the second symbol display device alternates the symbol “◯” and symbol “X” as a normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, whether or not to win is determined by lottery. As a result of the lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery result indicating whether or not the game is successful, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display device after the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is in a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to be shorter during the probability change or the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the lottery of the normal symbol can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  In addition, during probability change or time reduction, other methods (for example, increasing the probability of winning a normal symbol, increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit, etc.) When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640, the time required for displaying the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be shorter than normal during the probability change or the short time, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entrance 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right of the game board are It is configured to pass. When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) wins lottery. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable symbol display is being performed in the second symbol display device, the number of passages is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is the first symbol display device 37a described above. , 37b as well as a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the second symbol is performed by alternately lighting a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X”) on the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. Alternatively, a part of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of assembling of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to one and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol hold lamp may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 is provided through which a ball can win. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on due to the on of the first entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 as viewed from the front, a second entrance 640 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entry due to the on of the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball wins. In this embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 (for example, the first entrance The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the mouth 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 may be 5).

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state. (Enlarged state) and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640 easily.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is higher and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is shorter during normal change and during shorter time than normal. Accordingly, since the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol), the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, the ball can easily win the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second entrance 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. In addition, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640, so the first entrance with no electric accessory 64, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery win lottery opportunity is obtained by winning the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the normal entrance 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 to be in an open state, winning the second entrance 640. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second entrance 640 so that the sphere passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the normal entrance 67 is allowed to pass. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory and aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning a prize at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. )). The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed and is in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. On the other hand, in the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first entrance 64 or the lower left side of the first entrance 64, and may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first entrance port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, a first slide operation unit 500 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). A decorative accessory unit 700 is provided on the upper center side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 14). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 14). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a housing structure for the units 400 to 800 in the back case 310 will be described.

5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 300 when the operation unit 300 is viewed from the front. In FIG. 7,
A state in which the second slide operation unit 800 is attached to the back case 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 300 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall 311 and the outer wall 312 standing from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311. A back case 310 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 311a at the center of the bottom wall portion 311 thereof. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 300, a swing operation unit 400, a first slide operation unit 500, a box unit 600, a decorative accessory unit 700, and a second slide operation unit 800 are accommodated in the internal space of the back case 310, respectively. Configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the back case 310, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 312 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 312. It is arrange | positioned by the bottom wall part 311 in the aspect enclosed by (refer FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the second slide operation unit 800 is formed with a rectangular opening at a position that coincides with the opening 311a of the rear case 310 when viewed from the front.

  In the state shown in FIG. 7, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box unit 600, and the decorative accessory unit 700 are stacked on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800, respectively. It arrange | positions in a state and is accommodated in the back case 310 (refer FIG. 5).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) is superimposed on the front side with respect to a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800). Since it is disposed, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary part and to shield the other part from the player by another operation unit. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the standing object 400, the first slide operation unit 500, and the second slide operation unit 800 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 are appropriately referred to.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG. 8 shows a state in which the standing member 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged at the overhanging position, and in FIG. 9, the tilting object 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhanging position. FIG. 10 shows the state in which the slide objects 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the overhanging positions in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 400 swings on an arm member 420 that is pivotally supported on the base end side so as to swing, and on the swing end side that is the opposite side of the base end side of the arm member 420. The arm member 420 and the standing body 410 are moved between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Let In the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the standing object 410 and the arm member 420 are retracted below the opening 311a of the back case 310 and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 420 is lifted, and the upright member 410 is disposed at the center of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 500 includes a tilting object 510 that is slid and moved obliquely downward, and a turn that can be turned clockwise and counterclockwise about a turning shaft 520 a. And an accessory 520. The tilting accessory 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the tilting accessory 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 9, the tilting accessory 510 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 800 includes slide features 810, 820, 830, and 840 that are formed to be slidable. Is operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the right slide accessory 810 and the left slide accessory 820 are retracted to the left and right outward of the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and the upper slide accessory 830 and the lower The side slide accessory 840 is retracted to the outside of the upper and lower sides of the opening 311a of the back case 310, and cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 10, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). The

  Further, the right slide combination 810 and the left slide combination 820 are configured to operate on the same plane. As shown in FIG. 10, the protruding position of the right sliding tool 810 is on the right side of the protruding position of the left sliding tool 820, and the right sliding tool 810 and the left sliding tool 820 interfere with each other. There is no (contact). Similarly, the upper slide combination 830 and the lower slide combination 840 are configured to operate on the same plane. As shown in FIG. 10, the protruding position of the upper sliding tool 830 is above the protruding position of the lower sliding tool 840, and the upper sliding tool 830 and the lower sliding tool 840 interfere with each other. There is no contact (contact).

  Further, the plane on which the right slide combination 810 and the left slide combination 820 operate is closer to the game board 13 than the plane on which the upper slide combination 830 and the lower slide combination 840 operate. Yes (see FIG. 10). Therefore, the operation of the upper slide combination 830 or the lower slide combination 840 is not hindered by the right slide combination 810 or the left slide combination 820. Conversely, the operation of the right slide combination 810 or the left slide combination 820 is not hindered by the upper slide combination 830 or the lower slide combination 840. Therefore, since the freedom degree of operation | movement of each slide accessory 810,820,830,840 can be raised, the production effect of the operation unit 300 can be heightened.

  The second slide operation unit 800 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state in which each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is overhanging.

  Next, a case where a plurality of units constituting the operation unit 300 operate in a composite manner will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 11 shows the operation unit 300 in the case where the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 and the slide objects 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended positions. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 510 operates in front of the second slide operation unit 800 with respect to the game board 13. That is, the operation of the tilting member 510 is not hindered (interfered) regardless of the arrangement of the respective slide objects 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800. In addition, the slide members 810, 820, 830, and 840 are not hindered (interfered) regardless of the arrangement of the tilting member 510. Therefore, since the freedom degree of operation | movement with the inclination member 510 and each slide combination 810,820,830,840 can be raised, the production effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 800 is disposed between the first slide operation unit 500 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 500 and the third symbol display are displayed. A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 800 is generated between the device 81 and the apparatus 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked from being seen in front view. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined in the left-right direction from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 and the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are all arranged at the overhanging position. Thus, the gap that the player peeks in from the oblique direction can be filled with each of the sliding objects 810, 820, 830, and 840. Thereby, it can shield reliably so that a part of display area P of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 cannot be visually recognized, and the production effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 shows a case where the standing component 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 and the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended positions. 3 is a front view of an operation unit 300. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the standing object 410 and the arm member 420 operate on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800 with respect to the game board 13. That is, regardless of the arrangement of the slide objects 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800, the operations of the standing object 410 and the arm member 420 are hindered (interfered). There is no. Further, regardless of the arrangement of the standing combination 410 and the arm member 420, the operations of the slide combination 810, 820, 830, and 840 are not hindered (interfered). Therefore, since the freedom degree of operation | movement with the standing component 410, the arm member 420, and each slide combination 810,820,830,840 can be raised, the production effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 800 is disposed between the swing operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the swing operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 are disposed. A gap of 800 minutes for the second slide operation unit is generated between the two. Therefore, when only the standing component 410 of the swing operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position, the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded from being partially visible in front view. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined in the left-right direction from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the standing combination 410 of the swing operation unit 400 and the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are all arranged at the extended position. Thus, the gap that the player peeks in from the oblique direction can be filled with each of the sliding objects 810, 820, 830, and 840. Thereby, it can shield reliably so that a part of display area P (refer FIG. 2) of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 cannot be visually recognized, and the effect effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  FIG. 13 shows the operation unit 300 in the case where the central swinging accessory 720 of the decorative accessory unit 700 and the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the overhang positions. FIG. Here, as illustrated in FIG. 13, the decorative accessory unit 700 is configured to include a left-hand swinging hand 710, a central swinging hand 720, and a right-hand swinging hand 730, and the central swinging hand 720. Is operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. Further, the decoration unit 700 swings each swinging accessory 710, 720, 730 at the retracted position (origin position) (see FIG. 5).

  The central swinging accessory 720 is disposed on the front side of the left swinging accessory 710 and the right swinging accessory 730 with respect to the game board 13 (that is, the central swinging accessory 720 is Therefore, even if the left-hand rocking role 710 or the right-hand rocking role 730 is swung, the central rocking role is not necessary. There is no interference (contact) with the object 720. Further, even if the swinging operation or the overhanging operation is performed with respect to the central swinging accessory 720, the left swinging accessory 710 or the right swinging accessory 730 is not interfered (contacted). Therefore, it can suppress that each rocking | fluctuation agent 710,720,730 mutually interferes the operation | movement of another rocking | fluctuation character, and can raise the freedom degree of operation | movement. Therefore, the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  Further, the center swinging accessory 720 is disposed on the near side of the game board 13 with respect to the sliding features 810, 820, 830, and 840. Therefore, the central swinging combination 720 and the sliding combination 810, 820, 830, 840 can be operated without causing interference with each other. Therefore, since the freedom degree of operation | movement can be raised, the presentation effect of the operation | movement unit 300 can be improved.

  The box-shaped unit 600 does not have a member that protrudes to the center of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 400, 500, 700, and 800. . Therefore, the box-shaped unit 600 is always kept in a state where it is arranged on the left side of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (see FIG. 5).

  Thus, each unit 400 to 800 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the units 400 to 800 are arranged in a stacked state (stacked). As for those arranged in different layers, even if the operating member is in a mode of projecting inward of the opening 311a of the back case 310, it can be operated simultaneously. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 13, each unit 400 to 800 can be operated not only independently, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of production can be enhanced. The units 400 to 700 are arranged in the same layer, and the units 400 to 700 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7). In other words, when the accessory included in any one of the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, and the decorative accessory unit 700 is in the extended position, the accessory included in the other unit. If they are moved to the extended position, they interfere with each other (contact). Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, operating conditions are defined for each unit in order to prevent the objects constituting the units arranged in the same layer from interfering with each other. And when operating the accessory which comprises any unit among each unit 400-700, it is comprised so that operation | movement of an accessory may be permitted only when it determines with not interfering with another unit. . Thereby, it can suppress that an accessory collides and damages an accessory by the impact of the collision. In addition, since the operation of the accessory is hindered by another accessory, the operation of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of accessories are provided in order to execute various operation effects. Each of these accessories is driven by a corresponding accessory motor 229 (see FIG. 14). Here, if each accessory motor 229 is driven indefinitely, current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) that can be used by the accessory motor 229 is consumed, and normal operation can be performed. There is a risk of disappearing. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a total value of load current values (power consumption) consumed by driving each accessory is calculated, and the total value of the load current values (power consumption) is calculated as described above. When it is determined that the current capacity (lower than the rated power) is exceeded, the driving of some or all of the accessory motors 229 is stopped. Thereby, it can suppress that load current (electric power) exceeding the current capacity (rated electric power) which can be used with respect to the accessory motor 229 is consumed. Therefore, it can suppress that the pachinko machine 10 operates abnormally or breaks down. In determining whether or not to stop the accessory, it may be determined whether the total load current exceeds the current capacity or whether the total power consumption exceeds the rated power. Good. Based on the specifications of the power supply device 15 employed in the pachinko machine 10, the stricter condition may be selected as the discrimination symmetry.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. The variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first per-random number counter C1, but the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 15B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”. Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit B is associated and defined. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a normal symbol hit in the normal state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 15C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 15C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a win.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device, and display setting on third symbol display device 81, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like include special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81, etc. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes four execution areas and four reservation areas corresponding to the first entrance 64 (see Fig. 1 reservation first to fourth areas) and four reservation areas corresponding to the second entrance 640 ( The special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a consisting of the special figure 2 reservation 1st to 4th area) is provided, and in each of these areas, the first entry time to the first entrance 64 is set in accordance with the first entry timing. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. When the first per-random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first per random number table 202a for the special symbol with a high probability and the first per random number table 202a for the special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7” is the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability time. Stored in In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270” are It is stored in the first per random number table 202a for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number that is a big hit stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability and the random hit that is stored in the first per-random number table 202a for high probability. Random numbers that are big hits are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which the random value appears may be analyzed. In other words, there is a risk that the jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. Thus, since it is possible to make it difficult to analyze the random value that is a big hit of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), in the first hit type counter C 2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that one of the two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) is determined by the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Yes. The random value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 15B). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It has been.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d includes, for example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disconnection (for a short time)”, “disconnection normal reach”, “discovery super reach”, "Special reach" is defined, variation patterns of jackpot A and jackpot B shared, "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach" is defined, variation pattern for jackpot A, Various types of “special reach” are defined, and “various common reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is the winning symbol of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. When the value of the random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table, it is determined that the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is hit. In addition, this second random number table is used for the low probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for time (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers to be won is 24 among the total number of random numbers 240, so the probability of being a normal symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 30 seconds. And if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is opened “for 0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is “0.2 second × 1 time. ”Is opened, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 200 among the total number of random numbers 240, so the probability of winning the normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “2 times per second”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and is further associated with the second entrance 640. The opening period of the electric accessory to be performed becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. A second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202. Is provided. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 35), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c, a special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d, It has a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e, a probability variation flag 203f, and an hour / medium counter 203g.

  The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a includes one execution area, four reserved areas corresponding to the first entrance 64 (Special Figure 1 reserved first area to Special Figure 1 reserved fourth area), and second input There are four reserved areas (Special Figure 2 Reserved First Area to Special Figure 2 Reserved Fourth Area) corresponding to the ball outlet 640. In each of these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in the first entrance 64. Among the vacant areas of the corresponding four reserved areas (Special Figure 1 Reserved First Area to Special Figure 1 Reserved Fourth Area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). . That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  The same applies to the case where a ball enters the second entrance 640. In other words, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start prize), and the acquired data corresponds to the second entrance 640 4. Among the vacant areas of the two reserved areas (the special figure 2 reserved first area to the special figure 2 reserved fourth area), the areas are sequentially stored from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). In addition, when data is stored in all of the four reserved areas corresponding to the second entrance 640, nothing is newly stored.

  When a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved first area or the special symbol 2 reserved first area. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a special symbol lottery or the like is determined based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery (lottery of the special figure 2) based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 is performed, and the ball is entered to the first entrance 64. It is configured to execute preferentially over a special symbol lottery (the lottery shown in FIG. 1) based on entering the ball. That is, when data is stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area, the shift process is performed in the special figure 2 reserved first area regardless of whether data is stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area. The stored data is shifted to the execution area.

  When data is shifted from either the reserved first area to the execution area of the special figure 1 reserved first area or the special figure 2 reserved first area, the reserved first area where the data shift has been performed is in an empty state. Become. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning. Immediately, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S407 and S414 in FIG. 30). When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c is a variable display (third figure) of a special symbol (first figure) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. This special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, The number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth 64 is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S206 in FIG. 28).

  The special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is a special symbol (first symbol) variable display (third symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. This special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and whenever a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of fluctuating held balls increases, The number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth 640 is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 (see S411 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S209 in FIG. 28).

  The value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N1 of the variable display hold based on the entry to the first entrance 64), and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d (second entry port) The number N2 of the variable display hold based on entering the ball 640 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S207 and S210 in FIG. 28, and S405 and S412 in FIG. 30). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 controls the main control by a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls of the variable display held in the device 110 itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e sets the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 to a maximum of four. It is a counter that counts up to once. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 31).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 32: No).

  The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the probability change flag 203f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if it is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). Show. The initial value of the probability variation flag 203f is set to OFF, and if the jackpot A (probability variation jackpot) is won, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON when the end of the jackpot A is set.

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203f is referred to. If the probability variation flag 203f is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the high probability first random number table 202a, while the probability variation flag 203f is off. For example, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 29).

  The hour / minute counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the hour / medium counter 203g has an initial value set to zero, and when the jackpot B (time / short jackpot) is won, 100 is set as the value when the end of the jackpot B is set. That is, when the big hit B is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / minute counter 203g.

  When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203g is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per-random number table for low probability (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 31).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as axes. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation) The display control device 114 controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 228, accessory motor 229, etc. are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  For example, the accessory motor 229 is configured by a known stepping motor, and a plurality of accessory motors 229 are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. The accessory motor 229 is driven by a corresponding motor control IC (motor driver). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives the corresponding accessory motor 229 based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC that can set the operation for a plurality of accessory motors 229, or may be a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers). ) May be provided to operate the accessory motors 229 corresponding to different accessories. When a motor control IC (motor driver) capable of setting operations for a plurality of accessory motors 229 is employed, the type of the accessory accessory motor 229 to be driven is included in a command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like. It is only necessary to include information for specifying the output.

  When the control IC (motor driver) operates the accessory motor 229 based on the set command, the operation is performed on the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 every time the operation of one step is performed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that it has been made is output. With this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin position. That is, the origin position is set to a 0 step position, and the value is updated by 1 each time an execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, the value is incremented by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin position to the overhang position. Further, the value is subtracted by 1 every time one step operation is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the overhang position to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation position of each accessory based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement that is set for each accessory, and is a position that shifts in origin return based on power-on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor for detecting whether or not it is the origin position. If the origin sensor is not on when the power is turned on, the accessory is detected until the origin sensor detects that it is on. (That is, the accessory motor 229 is driven). This origin position becomes the reference position for the operation of each accessory. Note that the above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory reaches the origin position by the origin return (that is, when the origin sensor detects ON). As described above, the value of the step counter is updated one by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  An example of control of the accessory motor 229 by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, one round in four steps) will be described as an example. The rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 88 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of an accessory motor 229 composed of a stepping motor. The accessory motor 229 is configured such that a portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited by sending excitation control data from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, excitation is performed by the motor control IC by excitation control data composed of a 4-digit binary number corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any one of A, B, C, and D) of the accessory motor 229 is “1”, the excitation is performed and the excitation control data is “0”. If so, it is not excited. For example, if the excitation control data is “1100”, A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 88B) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The sound lamp control device 113 has an excitation counter used for selecting and setting one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 88B). Is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from “0”, and when the value of the excitation counter becomes “3”, the value returns to “0” when the value is updated. It has become. Each time this excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the accessory motor 229 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Furthermore, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. When updating in the negative direction, the direction of rotation of the accessory motor 229 is opposite to that when updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether the direction is positive or negative) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which an operation is set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the accessory motor 229. Specifically, for example, in the case of the accessory motor 229 that rotates once in one step (that is, 360 steps are required for the motor to make one rotation), the excitation counter is in the range of “0” to “359”. It becomes the updated loop counter.

  Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the accessory motor 229 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an excitation table defining excitation control data and the state of the accessory motor 229 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), as the sequence data corresponding to the accessory motor 229, the excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of the excitation counters “0” to “3”. Each data is defined. Further, when “1100” that is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “0” is set, the positions A and B of the accessory motor 229 are excited. Further, when “0110” which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “1” is set, the positions B and C of the accessory motor 229 are excited, so the excitation counter value is “0”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from this state. When “0011”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “2”, is set, the positions C and D of the accessory motor 229 are excited, and the excitation counter value is “1”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise. When “1001”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “3”, is set, the positions A and D of the accessory motor 229 are excited, so the excitation counter value is “2”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from this state. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 88, each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction, the accessory motor 229 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the accessory motor 229 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise.

  As described above, the control of the accessory motor 229 has been described with a simplified operation model. However, in the accessory motor 229 actually used in this embodiment, the excitation counter is updated by one step (ie, the excitation counter is updated by one). Can be rotated one degree each time. That is, when changing each accessory, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 as many times as the number of steps to be changed, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be varied accurately.

  Note that a unique operation pattern corresponding to the production is set for each accessory. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time. For example, as an operation pattern of the standing accessory 410, it is defined that the accessory motor 229 is operated in the forward direction by 10 steps during a period from when the operation starts to 0.2 seconds elapses. ing. That is, at the operation start timing of the standing object 410, 10 times are set as the number of operation steps for the motor driver, the positive direction (direction toward the overhang position) is set as the rotation direction, and the rotation speed is set every 20 ms. An operation pattern for outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (0.2 second / 10 steps) for one-step operation is defined. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and when 0.2 seconds elapses from the start of the operation, the operation is performed for 10 steps.

  Further, for 1.6 seconds from 0.2 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the operation start timing, it is specified that the accessory motor 229 is operated in 160 steps in the forward direction. That is, when 0.2 seconds have elapsed from the operation start timing of the standing object 410 (that is, when the value of the step counter becomes 10), 160 times are set as the number of operation steps for the motor driver, An operation pattern for outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (1.6 seconds / 160 steps) for setting a positive direction (direction toward the overhang position) as the rotation direction and setting a rotation speed for one step every 10 ms as the rotation speed. It is prescribed. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and is in a state in which 170 steps (160 steps + 10 steps until 0.2 seconds) have been operated when 1.8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation.

  Further, for 0.2 seconds from 1.8 seconds to 0.2 seconds after the operation start timing, it is specified that the accessory motor 229 is operated in 10 steps in the forward direction. That is, when 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the operation start timing of the standing object 410 (that is, when the value of the step counter becomes 170), the motor driver is set to 10 operation steps, An operation pattern that outputs a command for setting a rotation speed (0.2 second / 10 steps) for setting a positive direction (direction toward the overhanging position) as a rotation direction and a step operation every 20 ms as the rotation speed is set. It is prescribed. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and when the operation has started, the operation is performed for 180 steps (10 steps + 170 steps until 1.8 seconds have elapsed) when 2.0 seconds have elapsed. In addition, this position corresponds to the overhanging position of the standing object 410 (see FIG. 8).

  The operation pattern is defined so that a stop command for setting the operation stop for 2 seconds is set. After stopping for 2 seconds at the extended position, an operation pattern is defined so that an operation for returning the standing object 410 to the origin position is executed. Specifically, after 4 seconds from the start of the operation, the operation step number is set to 10 times, the rotation direction is set to the negative direction (direction toward the origin position), and the rotation speed is set to operate at one step every 20 ms. An operation pattern for outputting a command for setting is defined. Thereby, it can return to the origin position side by 10 steps over 0.2 seconds.

  Next, after 4.2 seconds from the start of the operation (that is, 0.2 seconds after the operation starts in the direction from the overhang position to the origin position), the operation step number is set to 160 times and the rotation direction is negative. An operation pattern for setting a direction and outputting a command for setting a rotation speed for one step operation every 10 ms as a rotation speed is defined. Thereby, it can return to the origin position side by 160 steps over 1.6 seconds. Then, after 5.8 seconds from the start of the operation, 10 times are set as the number of operation steps, a negative direction is set as the rotation direction, and a command for setting the rotation speed for one step operation every 10 ms is output as the rotation speed. The operation pattern is specified. Thereby, it can return to an origin position.

  By operating according to this operation pattern, the standing object 410 can be moved to the overhang position for 2 seconds, then stopped for 2 seconds at the overhang position, and then returned to the origin position over 2 seconds. . The operating speed (rotational speed of the accessory motor 229) is set to be slower than the rotational speed set in other periods immediately after the operation is started or after the operation stop period has elapsed. This is to normally excite. That is, when starting the operation of the stopped accessory motor 229, if the rotational speed is too high (the frequency of the pulse output from the motor driver is too high), the accessory motor 229 is based on the excitation control data. Excitation based on the next excitation control data may be started before the excitation is performed, and the accessory motor 229 may not be excited (step out) in the order of the excitation control data. . Therefore, when the operation of the accessory motor 229 is started, by setting a relatively slow rotation speed, the output interval of the excitation control data is prevented from becoming too short, and the accessory motor 229 is stepped out. Is suppressed.

  In addition, before stopping the accessory motor 229 (a period of 1.8 seconds to 2 seconds and a period of 5.8 seconds to 6 seconds after the start of the operation), it is slower than the rotation speed set in other periods. The reason is that the rotation of the accessory motor 229 is reliably stopped at the number of steps to be stopped. In other words, by slowing down the rotation speed and increasing the excitation control data output interval, the period from the last excitation control data output until the stop command is output can be extended. Can be received more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the stop command from being received and to reliably stop the rotation of the accessory motor 229 at a predetermined timing.

  As described above, the accessory motor 229 of the present embodiment is configured such that the motor rotates once every time one excitation control data is set. This one-step operation is configured such that every time new excitation control data is set, the motor is instantaneously excited with the new setting and rotated once. The period from the start to the end of this one-step (one time) operation is constant regardless of the excitation control data setting interval (excitation counter update interval). That is, the load current (power consumption) required to operate the motor in one step (once) is constant regardless of the excitation control data setting interval. The frequency of consuming load current (electric power) is reduced. Therefore, the load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is also reduced. Therefore, by reducing the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 immediately after the start of the operation, after the elapse of the operation stop period, and during the period before the operation stop, the load current (consumption) is reduced during these periods. Power) can be reduced. Therefore, when the operation start timing of one accessory is slightly before the operation stop timing of the other accessory (that is, a state in which the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 is reduced to stop the operation). The load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 for changing these accessories can be suppressed from becoming too high.

  As described above, the control content of the accessory motor 229 has been described by taking the standing accessory 410 as an example. It is defined in a motor control command setting table (not shown) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in association with the elapsed time from the operation start timing of the object. In addition, the operation pattern is defined for each accessory and each type of effect. When setting the operation of the accessory, it is easy to output each command by outputting the command specified in the motor control command setting table (not shown) at the timing specified in the motor control command setting table. A predetermined operation can be set.

  Thus, in this embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, the accessory motor 229 can be driven at the rotation speed, rotation direction, and number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of performance operations using an accessory.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the operation of the accessory motor 229 is completed based on a command set for the motor driver is determined based on the number of steps that the accessory motor 229 has operated. In other words, the operation set for the accessory motor 229 is completed based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal received from the motor driver is received each time one step of operation is set by the motor driver. It is determined whether or not it has been done, but is not limited to this. For example, it is configured to measure an elapsed time after setting a command for operating the accessory motor 229 and determine whether or not the operation of the accessory motor 229 is completed based on the elapsed time. May be.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 228, and when the player operates the frame button 228, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed so that an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, an operation error or a vibration error of an accessory) indicated by the received error command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without delay. .

  In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, at least a fluctuation pattern table 222a, an operation start condition table 222b, a load reference value table 222c, a power supply return operation table 222d, and an accessory operation setting table 222e are defined. .

  The variation pattern table 222a is referred to in order to select a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the rough variation effect (variation display) aspect notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table. Based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a, a variation pattern command for display is set (see S1704 in FIG. 43).

  The operation start condition table 222b is a data table that defines the operation start conditions when starting the operation of each accessory. In the operation start condition table 222b, operation start conditions are defined for each group composed of one or more accessories. By operating each group according to this operation start condition, it is possible to vary each accessory without interference (contact) between the actors.

  Here, the group refers to a set of one or more actors that do not interfere with each other even if the constituents to be configured are changed at the same time. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, five groups 1 to 5 are provided. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when operating an accessory, in principle, it is configured to perform a predetermined operation in units of groups, and can be operated alone or a plurality of groups can be simultaneously (composite). Various operations can be realized by operating them. The predetermined operation for each group is defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is configured to read out and set the operation content from the ROM 222 when the operation of each group is started.

  Note that the group 1 is composed of each accessory provided in the second slide operation unit. In this group 1, when the operation condition is satisfied, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is operated from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the overhang position (see FIG. 10), and then the origin position (FIG. 5). A series of operations of returning to the reference) is executed. The group 2 is composed of each accessory provided in the first slide operation unit 500. When the operation condition is satisfied, the group 2 is tilted while rotating the rotation accessory 520 clockwise with the rotation shaft 520 as the rotation axis. After the accessory 510 is moved to the extended position (see FIG. 11), the tilting accessory 510 is returned to the origin position (see FIG. 5) while the rotating accessory 520 is rotated counterclockwise. The action is executed.

  The group 3 is composed of each accessory provided in the swing operation unit 400. When the operation condition of the group 3 is established, the standing member 410 is moved to the extended position (see FIG. 8), and then the standing member is operated. A series of operations of returning the object 410 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) is performed. The group 4 is composed of a right-hand swinging hand 710 and a left-hand rocking hand 730 among the hands provided in the decorative handing unit 700, and when the operating condition is satisfied, the right-hand rocking hand 710, After the left-hand swinging accessory 730 performs the swinging operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5), a series of operations are performed in which the operation stops at the origin position (see FIG. 5).

  The group 5 includes a central swinging accessory 720 among the accessories provided in the decorative accessory unit 700, and is configured to be able to execute two types of operations according to the effects. Specifically, after performing the swinging operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5), a series of operations for stopping the operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5), and the overhang position (see FIG. 5) from the origin position (see FIG. 5). And a series of operations of returning to the origin position (see FIG. 5).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, a plurality of groups are provided, and a predetermined operation is performed for each group. Thereby, one group can be operated independently, or a plurality of groups can be operated simultaneously (composite), so that a wide variety of effects can be realized. Moreover, if it is configured so that the actions of a plurality of actors are set independently one by one, the operation condition becomes complicated. That is, it is determined whether or not to start each of the actors at the start timing of the action, such as during the stage of the production, or in the middle of the production, and further, the action corresponding to the accessory to be started. Must be set individually. On the other hand, if a group is defined as in the present embodiment, simply select a group to be operated, and execute a simple process of setting a predetermined operation for the selected group. Each accessory can be operated appropriately. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Note that among the swinging actors 710, 720, 730 constituting the decorative accessory unit 700, only the central swinging agent 720 is a different group (group 5). However, when the center swinging accessory 720 is lowered to the extended position, the other feature (the standing feature 410 or the tilting feature) is not affected. This is because there is a possibility of interference with the object 510). In other words, if all the accessories constituting the decorative accessory unit 700 are grouped in the same group, the central swinging accessory 720 must be operated at a timing that does not interfere with other accessories, and therefore the left swinging accessory. This is because the result of restricting the operation of the right swinging accessory 730 and the right swinging accessory 730 is obtained. In order to prevent this, in this embodiment, the central swinging combination 720 is grouped differently from the left swinging combination 710 and the right swinging combination 730, and the left swinging combination 710 and the right swinging combination are combined. The degree of freedom of movement of the object 730 is increased.

  With reference to FIG. 17A, the above-described operation start condition table 222b will be described in detail. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation start condition table 222b. As shown in FIG. 17A, the operation start condition table 222b defines an operation start condition for each group. Specifically, it is specified as an operation condition of group 2 that both the objects constituting group 3 and group 5 are the origin positions. This is because the tilting role 510 included in the group 2 moves to the extended position while the standing role 410 included in the group 3 or the central swinging role 720 included in the group 5 moves to the extended position. This is because there is a possibility of colliding with the standing feature 410 or the central swinging feature 720.

  In addition, as an operating condition of group 3, it is specified that the objects constituting group 2 and group 5 are both at the origin position. This is because the standing part 410 included in the group 3 moves to the extended position in a state where the tilting member 510 included in the group 2 or the central swinging member 720 included in the group 5 operates in the extended position. This is because there is a risk of colliding with the tilting combination 510 or the central swing combination 720.

  Furthermore, as an operating condition of group 5, it is defined that both the objects constituting group 2 and group 3 are the origin positions. This is because the central swinging member 720 included in the group 5 moves to the extended position while the tilting member 510 included in the group 2 or the standing component 410 included in the group 3 operates in the extended position. In this case, there is a possibility of colliding with the tilting object 510 or the standing object 410.

  On the other hand, for group 1 and group 4, no operation start condition is defined. This is because each slide combination 810, 820, 830, 840 constituting the group 1 and the right side swinging part 710 and the left side swinging part 730 constituting the group 5 are arranged in any manner. This is because the positional relationship is such that there is no possibility of interfering with the operation of another accessory.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, by setting the operating conditions of the actors in units of groups, it is possible to prevent the actors of different groups from interfering with each other. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the actors from colliding with each other and damaging the actors due to the impact of the collision. In addition, since the operation of the accessory is hindered by another accessory, the operation of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can be suppressed. In addition, it is only necessary to set the operation condition in units of groups instead of setting the operation condition for each accessory, so that the design can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the designer who sets the operation of the accessory at the time of designing. In addition, it is only necessary to prepare a table for setting operating conditions in units of groups, and it is not necessary to prepare a data table for setting operating conditions for each object. Therefore, the data amount of the operation start condition table 222b can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage area.

  In the present embodiment, five groups are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of groups may be reduced, for example, three groups. Thereby, the data amount of the data table can be further reduced. Further, the number of groups may be increased, and for example, seven groups may be configured. Thereby, since operation | movement of an accessory can be set more finely, the freedom degree of production operation | movement can be raised. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The load reference value table 222b is a data table that defines a value (drive load reference value) corresponding to a load current (power consumption) for driving each accessory motor 229 for each accessory. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, based on the load reference value table 222b, the total value of the load current (power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the accessory to be driven is the current capacity (rated power). Is exceeded (the total of the drive load reference values exceeds 100) or not. When it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the driving of the accessory to be newly driven is canceled.

  Details of the load reference value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the load reference value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 17 (b), the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 17 (b)) shows the load current (consumption for the drive load reference value (current capacity (rated power)) for each accessory constituting the group. The ratio of power) is specified.

  Specifically, the drive load reference values when the accessory motors 229 corresponding to the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 (group 1) are driven are all 15. It is. That is, when the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is driven, a load current (electric power) corresponding to the drive load reference value 15 is consumed. Therefore, when each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 (group 1) is changed simultaneously (see FIG. 10), it corresponds to the drive load reference value 60 (15 × 4). Load current (electric power) is consumed. For this reason, even if all the members of group 1 are varied at the same time, there is a margin of 40 in terms of the drive load reference value with respect to the current capacity (rated power), so within the range of the current capacity (rated power). , Can be operated simultaneously with other groups of actors.

  The driving load reference value when the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the tilting accessory 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 (group 2) is driven is 30, and the accessory corresponding to the rotating accessory 520 is used. The drive load reference value when the motor 229 is driven is 10. Therefore, when the actors constituting the group 2 are varied at the same time, a load current (electric power) corresponding to the drive load reference value 40 (30 + 10) is consumed. Note that the rotation accessory 520 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 520a as a rotation axis, but the drive load reference value is the same regardless of which direction it is rotated (10 ).

  Group 3 is composed of only the standing component 410 of the swing operation unit 400. The driving load reference value corresponding to the standing component 410 is 15. By driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the standing component 410, a load current (power) corresponding to the driving load reference value of 15 is obtained. Is consumed.

  The group 4 is composed of a left-hand swinging hand 710 and a right-hand swinging hand 730 among the handwork constituting the decorative handing unit 700. As shown in FIG. 17, the load reference values corresponding to these are all 10, and the driving load reference value is set to 10 by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each swinging accessory 710, 730. Corresponding load current (electric power) is consumed.

  The group 5 is composed of only the central swinging accessory 720 of the decorative accessory unit 700. The driving load reference value corresponding to the central swinging accessory 720 is 15. By driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the central swinging accessory 720, the load current corresponding to the driving load reference value of 15 is achieved. (Electric power) is consumed.

  In this embodiment, based on the drive load reference value defined in the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 17B), the accessory motor corresponding to the accessory being changed and the accessory to be newly changed. Control is performed so that the total of the load current (power consumption) of 229 is equal to or less than the current capacity (less than the rated power). More specifically, the driving load reference value corresponding to the driving accessory motor 229 and the driving load reference value of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the newly changed accessory are added, and the total is 100. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) will be consumed by newly changing the accessory, the role that was to be newly changed is determined. It is comprised so that operation | movement of a thing may be stopped.

  Here, conventionally, there are few kinds of accessories compared with recent gaming machines, and even if the accessories are operated freely, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. It never happened. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and the load current (electric power) consumed by operating the accessories has also increased. Therefore, when a plurality of objects are operated simultaneously, the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) may be consumed. In such a case, as a result of exceeding the specifications of the power supply device, the control device for controlling the accessory may shut down, the gaming machine itself may be turned off, or an operation abnormality of the accessory may occur. There was a possibility that a problem of stagnation would occur.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the accessory that was to be newly operated is used. Since the operation is configured to be canceled, the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within a load current (power consumption) within the current capacity (less than the rated power). That is, it is possible to suppress the load current (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation abnormality of the accessory Can be prevented from occurring.

  In the present embodiment, in order not to exceed the current capacity, the operating conditions are not set in detail for each accessory motor 229, but the accessory motor 229 is simply driven anew. In this case, it is determined whether or not the drive load reference value exceeds a predetermined value (100), and whether or not the accessory motor 229 is newly driven is determined. That is, driving of the accessory motor 229 within the range of the current capacity or less is realized by a relatively simple process. Therefore, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 only needs to describe a simple discrimination process in the program, and it is not necessary to prescribe the conditions for changing each accessory in detail in the data table or the like. The amount of work can be reduced. Moreover, since the amount of data such as a data table can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage capacity.

  In the load reference value table 222c of the present embodiment, only one type of load reference value corresponding to each accessory is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, for example, when each accessory motor 229 is rotated at a normal speed (when each operation step of the accessory motor 229 is set at every normal time interval), Two types of drive load reference values in the case of rotating at a slow speed (when each operation step of the accessory motor 229 is set at a time interval longer than usual) may be provided. In this case, when the sum of the drive load reference values when the normal speed is set exceeds 100, the sum of the drive load reference values becomes 100 or less by rotating the motor at a speed slower than usual. You may control as follows. When the operation step interval of the accessory motor 229 is lengthened, the average value of the load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is reduced, so that the drive load reference value can also be reduced.

  Further, the operation pattern of the accessory may be configured such that the operation speed changes during the operation (that is, the motor rotation speed changes), and the drive load reference value for each operation speed may be defined. . For example, each accessory is configured to operate the accessory control motor 229 at a lower speed than other operation periods (operation periods for normal speed) within 1 second after the operation starts and within 1 second before the operation ends. Alternatively, a low-speed drive load reference value and a normal-speed drive load reference value may be defined. Thereby, for example, when the operation start timing of one accessory is within 1 second before the end of the operation of the other accessory, it is possible to refer to the drive load reference value for the low speed instead of the normal speed. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there is a possibility of exceeding the current capacity (rated power) by starting the operation.

  The power recovery operation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when performing a power recovery operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally varied when the power is turned on. The power recovery operation is executed every time the power is turned on (regardless of whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). In the power supply return operation table 222d, a return operation for each type of accessory is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223f. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of any of the items due to the return operation, an error command is set (see S1503 in FIG. 41). This error command includes information indicating the type of abnormality and the location where the abnormality has occurred. The display control device 114 that has received this error command displays on the third symbol display device 81 the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality. Thus, by performing the return operation based on power-on, it is possible to quickly grasp whether or not an abnormality has occurred in each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from starting the game for the player without noticing that an abnormality has occurred in the accessory of the pachinko machine 10.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (origin return) before executing the power return operation based on the power return operation table 222d. That is, when the power supply is cut off during the change of the accessory, the power supply return operation is executed after the origin return is performed based on the power-on. As a result, it is sufficient to prepare only one type of power recovery operation starting from the origin position (the power recovery operation of different patterns needs to be specified according to the arrangement of the objects at the time of power-on. Therefore, the data amount of the power recovery operation table 222d can be reduced.

  The reason why the operation of the accessory is not continued when the power is cut off during the variable of the accessory and the power is turned on again is because the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. In other words, once the power is turned off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the performance that has been performed so far. Therefore, when the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the power return operation is performed after the origin return operation is executed. In the case where the presentation is in the middle of power-off, a simple display presentation is executed at least until the presentation period elapses after the power is restored. This simple display effect (an effect using an image when power is turned on, which will be described later) is configured so that the same effect is repeated until the end time of the effect, regardless of the degree of progress of the effect. The production can be displayed immediately without requiring the progress of the production. Therefore, after the power is turned on, no effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the effect period elapses, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uneasy. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the storage contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up, but backup power may be supplied and the information stored in the RAM 223 may be retained even after the power is shut off. As a result, when the power is cut off during the production, it is possible to determine the progress of the production when the power is turned off after the power is turned on, and the production can be continued from the beginning. be able to.

  Details of the power recovery operation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of the power recovery operation table 222d. As shown in FIG. 18, in the power return operation table 222d, the operation content of the accessory is defined for each value of the return pointer 223f. Although details will be described later, the return pointer 223f is used for the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) every time the main process (see FIG. 39) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation is completed. It is updated one by one.

As shown in FIG. 18, the power recovery operation table 222d of this embodiment (see FIG. 18).
Is configured so that the return operation is executed in the order of group 1 → group 2 → group 3 → group 4 → group 5 in accordance with the update of the return pointer 223f. In the return operation, each accessory is changed from the origin position to the overhang position and then returned to the origin position. In other words, the entire operation range in which the actors may change during the normal game is exhaustively operated by the return operation. Thereby, when abnormality has generate | occur | produced in one of the accessories, the abnormality can be detected reliably.

  Further, the power recovery operation table 222d of the present embodiment is configured to stop the operation for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after changing each accessory to the overhang position. As a result, it is possible to detect whether or not an abnormality occurs during the operation up to the overhang position and the operation from the overhang position to the origin position, and also detect whether or not an abnormality occurs during the operation stop. can do. It should be noted that an abnormality during operation stop is, for example, when the operation is not stopped despite the operation stop being set, or before the predetermined period (2000 ms) designated as the operation stop period elapses. For example, when returning to the position, the return operation to the origin position is not started even after the operation stop period has elapsed.

  Furthermore, the power recovery operation table 222d of the present embodiment is configured to set an operation stop period of a predetermined period (2000 ms) after the recovery operation of all the objects from group 1 to group 5 is completed. Yes. This stop period is a timing for ending the confirmation and shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 113 is normally started up in a shipping inspection or the like. Is provided. That is, if the accessory immediately operates after the return operation is finished, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 waits until the operated accessory returns to the origin and then shuts off the power supply or the operation of the accessory. The power supply must be turned off, and after the power supply is turned off, the accessory must be manually returned to the origin position, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by providing an operation stop period after the end of the return operation, if the power is cut off during the operation stop period, the power is cut off with all the objects in the origin position. State. Therefore, there is no need to wait until the position returns to the origin position or manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power is turned off, so that inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The accessory operation setting table 222e is a data table that defines the type (group) of the accessory to be operated and the operation timing in various effects of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the action of the accessory is set based on the accessory action setting table 222e.

  Details of the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the accessory operation setting table 222e. As shown in FIG. 19, the accessory operation setting table 222 e defines the timing for operating an accessory and the group of actors operated at the operation timing for each corresponding effect.

  Specifically, in the opening effect with a production time of 5 seconds, the action timing of the accessory is set at the start of the effect, and it is specified that the group of the actors to be operated at the operation timing is group 1. . That is, it is defined that each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is operated in accordance with the start of the opening effect. As described above, when the operating condition of the group 1 is established, after each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is operated from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the overhang position (see FIG. 10), A series of operations of returning to the position (see FIG. 5) is executed. Further, as described above, the control contents (commands output to the motor driver for each elapsed time) for setting this series of operations are defined in a motor control command setting table (not shown).

  In addition, in the super-reach production and the shared super-reach production where the production time is 20 seconds, it is specified that the group 4 and group 5 objects are swung at the timing when 8 seconds have passed since the production start. Yes. As described above, when the operation condition of the group 4 is established, the right-side swinging accessory 710 and the left-side swinging accessory 730 perform the swinging operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5), and then the origin position (see FIG. 5), a series of operations of stopping the operation is executed, and when the operating condition of the swinging operation is established in the group 5, the central swinging accessory 720 performs the swinging operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5). A series of operations for stopping the operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5) is executed.

  In addition, in the outlier super reach production and the shared super reach production, it is defined that the actors in group 2 are operated at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production. As described above, when the operation condition of the group 2 is established, the tilting combination 510 is moved to the overhang position while the rotation combination 520 is rotated clockwise about the rotation axis 520 (see FIG. 11). Then, a series of operations of returning the tilting combination 510 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) is performed while rotating the rotation combination 520 counterclockwise. By operating different actors at different timings, the player's sense of expectation for jackpots can be further improved.

  In addition, in the special reach A with a production time of 30 seconds off and the shared special reach A, it is defined that the actors of the group 3 are operated at the timing when 8 seconds have passed since the production start. As described above, when the operating condition of group 3 is established, the standing object 410 is moved to the extended position (see FIG. 8) and then the standing object 410 is returned to the origin position (see FIG. 5). Is performed.

  After that, it is defined that the actors of group 2 are operated at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, and the actors of groups 1 and 3 are operated at the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production ( That is, it is defined that the operation is performed so that the state shown in FIG. The more actors work, the more glamorous the appearance, and the higher the player's expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, by operating a plurality of groups (group 1 and group 3) in the final stage of the performance, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as the performance progresses. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the special reach B where the production time is off by 30 seconds and the shared special reach B, the actors of the group 1 and group 2 are operated at the timing when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production (that is, the state shown in FIG. 11). To operate). In addition, it is defined that the actors of group 3 are operated at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, and the actors of groups 1 and 3 are operated at the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production. Is stipulated. By making the operation pattern of the accessory different from that of the special special reach A and the shared special reach A, it is possible to execute different effects in the same effect period. Therefore, the production can be diversified.

  Further, in the special reach that is selected only when the production period is 30 seconds and the jackpot A is won, the actors of group 1 and group 2 are operated at the timing when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production (that is, , The operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. In addition, it is defined that the actors of group 3 are operated at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, the actors of group 1 are operated at the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, and group 5 It is defined that the accessory is moved down (that is, operated in the state shown in FIG. 13).

  In other words, until 25 seconds have passed since the start of the production, the action pattern of the accessory has been removed and is the same as that of the special reach B and the shared special reach B, and only the operation after 25 seconds from the start of the production is different. Therefore, before 25 seconds elapses, it can be difficult to distinguish whether it is out-of-order special reach B, shared special reach, or special reach from the action of the accessory. Therefore, it can be interestingly watched whether the player wins or misses until 25 seconds after the final stage of the production. In addition, when the actors of group 5 move down when 25 seconds have elapsed, the player recognizes that the current performance is a special reach (that is, the jackpot A is reached after the end of the variable performance). Can be made. Therefore, for the player who recognized that the big hit before the end of the production, in the remaining production period, for the satisfaction of the big hit and for the action that the big hit is determined You can have a sense of accomplishment.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the operation timing of the accessory and the group of the accessory to be operated are defined in the accessory operation setting table 222e, each group is assigned to each group based on the accessory operation setting table 222e. On the other hand, it is possible to realize various actions of the actors simply by executing a predetermined action.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the action of the accessory is not performed in all the changing effects, but the action of the accessory is set only in a part of the changing effects having a relatively long changing time. A variation effect with a relatively long variation time has a low probability of being selected as an effect for notifying a loss, and is easy to be selected as an effect for notifying a jackpot. The player can have a high expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not the accessory operates, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is configured such that the accessory is operated only in the opening effect or a part of the variation pattern effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that an accessory may be operated also in other effects, such as an ending effect and a round effect. Further, the type of variation effect for operating the accessory may be increased, and for example, the accessory may be operated even in a normal reach or a normal reach. Thereby, since production can be diversified, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a load value storage area 223e, and a return pointer 223f are stored. , An initialization flag 223g, an on-operation flag 223h, an accessory action flag 223i, and a discriminant value storage area 223j are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a corresponds to one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first entrance 64, and the second entrance 640. There are four areas (Special Figure 2 1st area to Special Figure 2 4th area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and holds the variable effect held in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times for each type of entrance.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, the special figure 1 post-addition after the addition is added. The reserved ball number command indicating the value of the ball number counter 203c or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when the main controller 110 displays a change in the special symbol and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is obtained. The reserved ball number command shown is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special lamp 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 and the special figure 2 reserved ball are received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203d is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1608 in FIG. 42). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special figure 1 pattern hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reservation ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command and the type of the hold ball (whether the hold is based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 or not) , Is the hold based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223 b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the third symbol display device The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the 81 small area Ds1. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1708 in FIG. 43). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The load value storage area 223e is a storage area for storing a value (drive load total value) corresponding to the total load current supplied to the driving accessory motor 229. This drive load total value is a value represented by the ratio of the load current value to the current capacity, similarly to the drive load reference value. For example, when all of the sliding objects 810, 820, 830, and 840 constituting the group 1 are variable, and the other objects constituting the group are stopped, the driving load reference corresponding to the group 1 60, which is the sum of the values, is stored in the load value storage area 223e.

  Whether or not the current capacity is exceeded when the accessory is newly driven based on the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory to be newly changed It is comprised so that it may determine. That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the drive load total value and the newly changed drive load reference value exceeds 100. When it is determined that the total exceeds 100 (that is, the load current supplied to the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity), the accessory corresponding to the accessory to be newly changed. The drive of the motor 229 is cancelled. Thereby, since the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within a load current range equal to or less than the current capacity, it is possible to suppress the load current from exceeding the current capacity. Therefore, when the current capacity is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or an operation abnormality of the accessory occurs. It is possible to suppress the trapping.

  The return pointer 223f is used to select the action data of the accessory from the power supply return operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) that defines the operation content of the return operation of the accessory that is executed when the power is turned on. More specifically, each time the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) executed at 1 ms intervals is executed, the return pointer 223f is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223f), and the update is performed. The action of the accessory indicated by the value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223f is cleared to zero (the value becomes 0000H) when the power is shut off. For this reason, every time the power is turned on, the recovery operation of the accessory can be executed from the beginning of the power recovery operation table 222d.

  The initialization flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for executing a recovery operation of an accessory executed based on power-on. While the initialization flag 223g is on, an initial operation process (see FIG. 41), which is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory, is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223g is off, it indicates that the return operation of the accessory has already been completed, so the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) is skipped (see S1401: No in FIG. 40). The initialization flag 223g is set to ON (see S1206 in FIG. 38) in the origin return process (see S37) of the start-up process (see FIG. 37). On the other hand, in the initial operation process, when it is determined that the recovery operation of the accessory has been completed (that is, when END information is read from the power recovery operation table 222d), it is set to OFF (see S1513 in FIG. 41). ).

  The on-operation flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the return to origin of the accessory executed before the power return operation is completed. If the input operation flag 223h is on, it indicates that the return to origin of the accessory has been completed, and if it is off, it indicates that the return to origin has not been completed. The input operation flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that the return to origin is completed (see S1507 in FIG. 41). Further, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, so that the on-operation flag 223h is also cleared (that is, turned off).

  The accessory operation flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not each accessory is variable. The accessory action flag 223i is composed of 2 bytes, and each accessory is associated with each bit. Specifically, in order from the lower bit, the right slide accessory 810, the left slide accessory 820, the upper slide accessory 830, the lower slide accessory 840, the tilting accessory 510, the turning accessory 520, and the standing accessory. 410, a left-hand rocking hand 710, a right-hand rocking hand 730, and a central rocking hand 720 are associated with each other.

  Each bit of the accessory action flag 223i indicates that the corresponding accessory is variable when the value is 1, and indicates that the corresponding accessory is stopped when the value is 0. In addition, the value of the empty bit is fixed to 0. For example, if the upper byte of the accessory action flag 223i is 00H (ie, 00000000B in binary notation) and the lower byte is 40H (ie, 01000000B in binary notation), the standing object 410 is variable. Yes, meaning that the other character is stopped. Based on the state of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i, the type of the active accessory can be specified.

  The discriminant value storage area 223j is a storage area for storing discriminant values for discriminating whether or not the total load current supplied to drive the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity. Specifically, a value (discriminant value) obtained by adding the drive load total value stored in the load value storage area 223i and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory motor 229 to be newly driven is obtained. Remembered. Based on whether or not the discriminant value is 100, it is discriminated whether or not a load current exceeding the current capacity is to be supplied, and when the current capacity is exceeded, the accessory motor to be newly driven The driving of 229 is cancelled. Thereby, since the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within a load current range equal to or less than the current capacity, it is possible to suppress the load current from exceeding the current capacity. Therefore, when the current capacity is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or an operation abnormality of the accessory occurs. It is possible to suppress the trapping.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power (drive current) to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as a solenoid 209, motors, and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storage. The character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written is generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting data for one page including data corresponding to the designated address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 A process of reading from the other bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program in the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, each page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44). The main image at power-on is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after power-on. Compared to images displayed during normal games, the amount of data is small and the images are simple. For this reason, it is possible to quickly transfer image data and display an image after the power is turned on.

  When the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a command to start variation during display of the main image when the power is turned on, the display control device 114 On the main image display screen when the power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol The change image is alternately displayed during the change period. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is “special symbol jackpot”, “○” symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” symbol is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, for example, even when an operation abnormality of an accessory is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 displays both the error type and the error occurrence location by an error command. To notify. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state. As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces (back surfaces A to C) corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of “city stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”), Information specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 22).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 55 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 46B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 46B) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46 (b) S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 55A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 56) for transferring image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 23) described below describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 46B). ) (See S2103)), pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 23), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 23, the rear image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed (FIG. 46B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The opening data transfer flag 233i is a flag indicating whether or not it is a timing for starting transfer of image data used for the opening effect. Show. On the other hand, if it is OFF, it indicates that it is not the transfer timing of the image data used for the opening effect.

  The opening data transfer flag 233i is a display stop received from the sound lamp control device 113 during the stop type command process (see FIG. 48B), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 47). When it is determined that the type command is a command indicating a jackpot stop type, it is set to ON (see S2405 in FIG. 48). Further, in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56), it is set to off when setting the transfer of image data used for the opening effect (see S3510 in FIG. 56).

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 56). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 46B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24 to FIG. 26, an example will be described in which the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the actions of various types of accessories are combined to produce one effect. First, FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reach effect (a combination effect combination reach effect) in which a display image and an action of an accessory are combined. As described above in the description of FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the above-described combination of combined reach effects is generated as a part of effects performed when reach occurs. In addition, the combined-combination reach effect is configured to easily appear in the case of the reach effect that is a big hit, and is configured to be less likely to appear in the case of a missed reach. As described above, the probability that the special symbol is a big hit is 1/300 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/30 in the high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the combined-combination reach effect that does not easily appear in the case of outlier reach is reduced.

  In the example of FIG. 24, in the combined special reach production, in the detachment special reach A or the shared special reach A, 8 seconds have passed immediately after the production start (see FIG. 24A) and 8 seconds have passed. FIG. 24 shows a state in which the accessory is operated based on the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 24B). As shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the combined-combination reach effect, among the changing symbol sequences, the right symbol sequence and the left symbol sequence stop at the same symbol (for example, “7” symbol) ( (See FIG. 24 (a)). Then, before the middle symbol row stops, the standing object 410 is changed and moved to the extended position (the central portion of the third symbol display device 81) (see FIG. 24B). Although not shown in the drawing, the swinging actors 710, 720, and 730 constituting the decorative accessory unit are swung at the origin position. Thereby, it can be made to recognize easily that it is a combined-combination reach effect by having acted the standing component 410 with respect to the player. Further, as described above, since the combined-combination reach effect is configured to easily appear when a big hit is made, the player can be expected to make a big hit after the end of the change. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded by newly operating the accessory motor 229, the driving of the accessory motor 229 is canceled. It is configured. In other words, there are cases where the standing feature 410 cannot be changed even though the combination of complex effects is selected. For example, in the power recovery operation, when the transfer operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is being executed, the transfer of all the resident images is completed, and the start condition of the combination composite reach effect is satisfied It is. In this case, since the load current corresponding to the drive load reference value of 60 is used to operate each slide accessory (group 1) (see FIG. 17 (b)), the standing accessory 410, and If each swinging combination 710, 720, 730 is operated, a load current exceeding the current capacity is consumed. Therefore, the operation of the standing combination 410 and each swinging combination 710, 720, 730 is as follows. Canceled. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with an alternative effect in place of the accessory complex reach effect so that the player can recognize that it is an accessory complex reach effect.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of an alternative effect. In this alternative effect, instead of changing the standing object 410 to the overhanging position (see FIG. 24B) in the combined effect reach effect, the fish jumps in the middle symbol row portion of the third symbol display device 81. Display an image. This effect that the fish bounces is configured not to appear in an effect other than the alternative effect. In addition, even when the standing object 410 moves to the overhang position (see FIG. 24B) in the combined effect reach production, the appearance is as if the fish jumped on the water. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the alternative effect is an effect of the same system executed instead of the accessory composite reach effect. Therefore, even if the operation of the standing character 410 is canceled, by displaying the alternative effect, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit after the reach effect is finished.

  FIG. 26A is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect (opening effect) for notifying the player of the start of a jackpot when the result of the variation effect is a jackpot. In this opening effect, the operation of group 1 is set, and a predetermined display effect (see FIG. 26A) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 is moved to the extended position, and each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 of the third symbol display device 81 is operated. The word “congratulations” is displayed in the display area corresponding to the “heart” -shaped opening formed by (see FIG. 26A). In this way, by displaying the character representing the congratulations, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has been achieved. In addition, it is configured to attract the player's attention to the pachinko machine 10 by swinging each swinging accessory 710, 720, 730 at the origin position. Thus, the player can be surely noticed that the big hit is started. Therefore, as a result of the player not noticing the start of the jackpot and not hitting the ball, it is possible to prevent the end condition of one or more rounds from being satisfied without causing the specific winning hole 65a to win the ball. can do.

  As in the case of the combined-combination reach effect, the driving of the accessory motor 229 is canceled when it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded by newly operating the accessory motor 229. Yes. That is, there are cases where each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, and 840 cannot be changed regardless of the start timing of the opening effect. For example, the current capacity can be increased by operating each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 and each swing accessory 710, 720, 730, such as at the start timing of the opening effect during the return operation of the accessory. This is the case when a load current exceeding the load is to be supplied. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment provides an alternative effect in place of the opening effect so that the player can recognize that the jackpot is started.

  FIG. 26B is a diagram showing an example of an alternative effect that is executed when the action of the accessory is canceled in the opening effect. In the alternative effect of the opening effect, an image similar to the appearance when each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is moved to the extended position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Similarly to the normal opening effect, the word “congratulations” is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even if operation | movement of each accessory is canceled, it can make a player recognize easily that it is a big hit start timing. Therefore, since the player can have a sense of happiness due to the start of the jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d are acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 ( Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S205).

  In the process of S205, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S205: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S206). ), A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special figure 1 held ball number counter 203c from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S207, the data corresponding to the ball entering the first ball slot 64 is shifted among the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S208). In the process of S208, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved first area to the special figure 1 reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, special figure 1 hold first area → execution area, special figure 1 hold second area → special figure 1 hold first area, special figure 1 hold third area → special figure 1 hold second area, special figure 1 hold second area The data in each area is shifted, such as FIG. 1 reserved fourth area → special figure 1 reserved third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S212.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1. (S209), a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S210). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S210, the data corresponding to the ball entering the second entrance 640 is shifted among the data stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S211). In the process of S211, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area to the special figure 2 reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, special figure 2 hold first area → execution area, special figure 2 hold second area → special figure 2 hold first area, special figure 2 hold third area → special figure 2 hold second area, special figure 2 hold second area The data in each area is shifted such as FIG. 2 reserved fourth area → special drawing 2 reserved third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S212.

  In the process of S212 executed after the process of S208 or S211, a special symbol change start process for starting a change display (change effect) based on the data of the execution area is executed (S212). Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the variation effect being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S212) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, if it is off, the green LED is turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S217), and the process proceeds to S220. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the process of S217, the opening command is set when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed. As a result, an opening effect (see FIG. 26 (a)) is executed, and a jackpot is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S218). If the value of the counter 203g is equal to or greater than 1 (S218: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203g is 0 (S218: No), the process of S219 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of S220, a stop command for stopping and displaying the changing third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S220), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S212). This special symbol change start process (S212) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203f of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203f is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state (probability variation state). If the probability variation flag 203f is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state.

  When the probability variation flag 203f is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state (probability variation state), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301, and the high A lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the probability first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, ten random numbers corresponding to the special symbol, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270”, are set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203f is off in the process of S302 (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 is the value of the pachinko machine 10 in the special symbol low probability state. Based on the first random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability. Only “7” is set as the random value that is a special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches “7”, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots (big hits) It is determined which of the jackpot types is A or jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (probable big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit B It is determined that it is (time and college hit) (see FIG. 15B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach” are defined, and “special reach” variations are provided for jackpot A. As a variation pattern for common hit / miss, “various common reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined.

  If it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is not a big hit (ie, it is out of the special symbol) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (FIG. 35). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning information process (S105), which is one of the timer interruption processes (see FIG. 27), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In this starting winning process (S105), it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and values indicated by various random number counters when there is a starting winning. And a pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no entry to the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a win to the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c is If it is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S408. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special figure 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special figure 1 held ball number counter 203c from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (special figure 1 reserved first area to special figure 1 reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the special figure 1 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 1 reserved second area is indicated, if the value is 2, the special figure 1 reserved third area is indicated, and if the value is 3, the special figure 1 reserved fourth area is indicated. These are the first areas.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the process of S406, prediction of whether or not the lottery for the special symbol (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. Then, a winning information command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the prediction result is set (S407), and the process proceeds to S408.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  In the process of S401, when the entrance to the first entrance 64 is not detected (S401: No), there is a win to the 1st entrance 64 and the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c When the value (N1) is 4 which is the maximum value (S403: No), and in the process of S408 executed when the process of S407 is completed, the ball has entered the second entrance 640. Whether or not (S408). In the process of S408, as in the process of S401, the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S408: Yes), the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S409), and the special figure 2 reserved ball is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S410).

  Then, whether there is no entry to the second entrance 640 (S408: No), or even if there is a win to the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203d is If it is not less than 4 (S410: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S408: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S410: Yes), the special figure 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S411). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S412).

  The reserved ball number command set here is also stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201, as will be described later, in the same manner as the reserved ball number command set in the process of S405. In the external output process (S901) of (see FIG. 35), it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S412, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop-type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the RAM 203. Are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to special figure 2 reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S413). In the process of S413, as in the process of S406, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the special figure 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 reserved second area is indicated, if the value is 2, the special figure 2 reserved third area is indicated, and if the value is 3, the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is indicated. These are the first areas.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the processing of S413, prediction of whether or not the lottery for the special symbol (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. Then, a winning information command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the prediction result is set (S414), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric motor accompanying the second entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the electric symbol associated with the second entrance 640 is controlled to open and close while the second symbol display device is displaying the hit. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S502). If the display mode is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). Note that the hour / short counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning slot 65a, so the electric accessory attached to the second inlet 640 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning slot 640 as much as possible. In addition, the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the upper right direction of the front view with respect to the second entrance 640 (see FIG. 2). Further, in the closed state of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball that has reached the specific winning opening 65a is guided in the lower right direction because the upper portion of the variable winning device 65 has a gentle inclination toward the lower right direction. Is done. Therefore, even if it is suppressed that the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, there are many balls that do not enter the specific winning entrance 65a and have flowed down to the lower right. Enter the mouth 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 15C).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507, Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 15C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S514). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 640 is set to 1 second, and the opening frequency is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S519). Is set to 3 seconds (S520), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) in the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or S518.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device starts the variation display being executed. Determination is made (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter One is added to the value 203M of 203e (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S812 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S812. Although details will be described later in the description of the main process (see FIG. 35), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is retained in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 35) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 27) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) or the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 has been updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S906). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process (S906), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) or the process of S309 is completed, The variation display being executed in the symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). 1 Stop display (lighting display) on the symbol display device 37.

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31) or the process of S521, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 31). To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). In the process of S908, if it is determined that the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 33 has been executed, the power-off process after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 34). When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) S217 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is being hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1007, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all eight rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1009, when it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and is determined to be the end timing of the ending effect. If so (S1011: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1012), and the process ends. The settings performed in the processing of S1012 include, for example, when the jackpot to be ended is jackpot A, when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, or when the jackpot to be ended is jackpot B For example, processing for setting 100 in the counter 203g can be mentioned. By executing the processing of S1012, the game state according to the jackpot type can be shifted to based on the end of the ending effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), this processing is ended as it is.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 43, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Then, the arrangement of each accessory is confirmed, and an origin return process is performed to return the accessory deviated from the origin position to the origin position (S1102). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, the return operation of the accessory can be started from the origin position by executing the origin return process (S1102).

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not the power-off process flag is on, the power-off process of S1317 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instant power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of (see FIG. 39) (S1103). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 39), it executes a power-off process in S1317. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1317 is in the middle of execution can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1103: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1317. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1104).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1105, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1104: No), the process proceeds to S1109.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1104: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1105. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1317, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1104: No), and the process proceeds to S1209.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1103: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1105 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1105, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1105). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1106: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1107). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1106: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1108), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1109, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1109). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1317 is executed (see S1316 in FIG. 39). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1317 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1109. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1317 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1109: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1110), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1111), and the interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1109 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1105 to S1107. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1109: No), S1110 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1111), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1112), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1110 is that when the process from S1105 to S1109 is reached via the process of S1107, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1105. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the origin return process (S1102) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 during the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this origin return processing. As described above, the origin return process is a process that is executed to return an accessory that is out of the origin position to the origin position when there is an accessory out of the origin position when the power is turned on.

  When this origin return processing (S1102) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that deviates from the origin position. In addition, as a method for determining whether or not the accessory is displaced from the origin position, for example, the state (rotation angle or the like) of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each accessory may be determined.

  If it is determined by the processing in S1201 that there is a feature that is deviated from the origin (S1201: Yes), first, all the features that constitute the group 1 (each slide feature 810, 820, 830, 840) are the origin. It is determined whether or not it is in the position (S1202), and when it is determined that all the objects constituting the group 1 are in the origin position (S1202: Yes), it is determined that the position is shifted from the origin position in the processing of S1201. In order to return all the accessories to the origin position, the operation of the accessory motor 229 is started (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1202 that the objects constituting the group 1 are deviated from the origin position (S1202: No), all the objects other than the group 1 are returned to the origin position. The object motor 229 is operated (S1203), and after the completion of the restoration to the original position, the accessory constituting the group 1 is set to return to the origin (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  Note that different processing is executed depending on whether or not it is necessary to return the group 1 to the origin position. The combination of the constituents constituting the group 1 and the other constituents constituting the other group is performed at the origin position This is because the load current exceeding the current capacity may be supplied to the accessory motor 229 during the return to origin operation. That is, even if the drive load reference values of the groups 2 to 5 are summed, the sum is only 90 (see FIG. 17B), so that all the objects of the groups 2 to 5 are simultaneously returned to the origin. Even if it is made variable, it does not exceed the current capacity. On the other hand, the total drive load reference value of group 1 is 60, and when it is varied at the same time as the objects constituting the other groups, there is a possibility that a load current exceeding the current capacity is supplied. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the accessory constituting the group 1 is deviated from the origin position, the accessory of the group 1 is returned to the origin position at a timing different from that of the other groups. It is configured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as supplying the load current exceeding the current capacity and shutting down the sound lamp control device 113 when the accessory is returned to the origin.

  If it is determined in the process of S1201 that there is no accessory deviating from the origin position, the processes of S1202 to S1205 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1206. In the process of S1201 executed when there is no accessory deviating from the origin position in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), the process of S1204 is completed, and the process of S1205 is completed, The activation flag 223g is set to ON (S1206), and this process is terminated. The initialization flag 223g is set to ON to indicate that the origin return operation is being performed.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312 and the variable display setting process of S1313 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1313 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 228 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 228 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 228 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 228 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 228 is pressed during a period when the change effect is not executed or during a high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, you can display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation by pressing the frame button 228, or press the frame button 228 during reach production, It is good also as a decision button for changing to the effect which can be held, or selecting the reach effect of the frame button 228 among several reach effects. If the frame button 228 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1310 is completed, an accessory control process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the accessory control process (S1311), the operation start or stop of the accessory is set according to the game situation. Details of this accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process is completed, a variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1313 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1314 (S1314: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1316), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1317). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1318), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the accessory control process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this accessory control process (S1311). This accessory control process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the operation start and stop of the accessory are performed. This is a process for setting.

  In this accessory control process (S1311), first, it is determined whether or not the power return operation of the accessory has been completed by determining whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on (S1401). If it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is turned on by the processing of S1401 (S1401: Yes), then the initial operation processing for setting the power return operation of the accessory is executed (S1402). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that should be set to stop operation (S1401: No). S1403). The accessory to be stopped is, for example, an accessory that has set an action and has reached the extended position, or an accessory that has returned to the origin position after setting a return operation from the extended position. In the process of S1403, when it is determined that there is an accessory for which the operation is to be stopped (S1403: Yes), after the operation stop of the accessory is set, the operation stop is set among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i. 0 is set to the bit corresponding to the selected accessory (S1404).

  Next, with reference to the load reference value table 222c, the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which the operation stop is set is specified, and the specified drive load is determined from the drive load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e. By subtracting the reference value, the driving load total value is updated (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1403, when it is determined that there is no accessory that should be set to stop operation, the processes of S1404 and S1405 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the process of S1406, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory for which operation start is to be set (S1406). Specifically, when the operation timing specified in the accessory operation setting table 222e is reached, the corresponding operation group is set to operate. For example, at the start of the opening effect, the group 1 corresponds to an accessory that should set the operation start. In the process of S1406, when it is determined that there is no accessory for which the operation start is to be set, this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that there is an accessory for which the operation start is to be set (S1406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation start condition of the group to which the accessory to which the operation starts belongs is satisfied. The determination is made based on the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17A) (S1407). If it is determined by the process of S1407 that the operation start condition is not satisfied (S1407: No), the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the operation start condition of the accessory for which the operation start is to be set is satisfied (S1407: Yes), the drive load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e, and the operation A value obtained by adding the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which it is determined that the start should be set is stored in the determined value storage area 223j (S1408).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is greater than 100 (S1409). If it is determined that the stored value is 100 or less (S1409: No), even if the accessory that has been determined to start operation in the processing of S1406 is operated, it is supplied to the accessory motor 229. This means that the total value of the load currents is within the range of the current capacity or less, so that the operation start of the accessory is set, and among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i, the operation start is set. 1 is set to the bit corresponding to (S1410). Then, the value stored in the discriminant value storage area 223j (the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory that has been determined to be set to start operation) are added. Is stored in the load value storage area 223e to update the drive load total value (S1411), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is greater than 100 (S1409: Yes), it is determined that the operation start should be set in the process of S1406. If the operation start is set, it means that a load current exceeding the current capacity is supplied to the accessory motor 229. Therefore, in this case, the operation start of the accessory is canceled (S1412), a display substitute effect command for displaying the substitute effect is set (S1413), and this process is terminated. The display substitute effect command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display substitute effect command, the display control device 114 starts the substitute effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26B) corresponding to the accessory whose operation stop has been canceled in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even if the operation of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to execute a display effect that makes it feel as if the accessory has operated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the production has the same level of expectation as when the actor moves, so that the player can play the game while having an appropriate degree of expectation for each production. Can be done.

  In the present embodiment, apart from the load value storage area 223e, there is provided a discriminant value storage area 223j for temporarily storing a calculation result for discriminating whether or not the total of the drive load reference values exceeds 100. However, the discriminant value storage area 223j may be omitted. In this case, when adding the driving load reference value corresponding to the accessory to be newly operated to the driving load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e and canceling the operation of the accessory, the operation is performed. The drive load reference value corresponding to the canceled accessory may be subtracted. Thereby, a storage area can be reduced.

  Next, an initial operation process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this initial operation processing (S1402). This initial operation process (S1402) is executed in the accessory control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process for setting the power return operation of the accessory as described above.

  In the initial operation process (S1402), first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation of an accessory has been detected (S1501). In the process of S1501, when an abnormal operation is detected (S1501: Yes), a notification operation corresponding to the accessory that detected the abnormal operation is set (S1502). Note that the notification operation according to an accessory is, for example, a voice notification of the type of an accessory in which an abnormality has occurred, an blinking LED around an accessory in which an abnormality has occurred, or an abnormality has occurred. For example, an LED of a different color is turned on according to the type of the accessory being performed. Thereby, it is possible to make the hall clerk easily recognize which of the bonuses provided in the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal. Therefore, the store clerk in the hall can be dealt with according to the accessory in which an abnormality has occurred.

  Next, an error command is set (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221, the display control device. Sent to 114. When receiving the error command, the display control device 114 starts error display on the third symbol display device 81 based on the information indicating the error type included in the error command and the type of the accessory in abnormal operation. Accordingly, the hall clerk can easily recognize the type of error and the accessory in which the error has occurred, so that the abnormal operation can be more easily resolved by the hall clerk.

  On the other hand, if an abnormal operation is not detected in the processing of S1501 (S1501: No), the processing of S1502 and S1503 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1504. In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the on-operation flag 223h is on (S1504). If it is determined that the on-operation flag 223h is off (S1504: Yes), the power supply return operation of the accessory is performed. Is not in the period for executing (i.e., the return of origin of the accessory is in progress), it is then determined whether or not there is an accessory whose origin has been returned (S1505). If it is determined that there exists (S1505: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1505 that there is no accessory that is returning to the origin (S1505: No), all the accessories are at the origin position when the origin return is completed or when the power is turned on. One of the cases where no return is necessary. In other words, in any case, it is indicated that all the objects are in the origin position. Accordingly, in this case, first, the number of drive steps of all the accessory motors is set to 0 (S1506), and the operation step number of the accessory motor 229 can be set based on the origin position of each accessory. To do. When the processing of S1506 is completed, an operation stop period of 1 second is then set (S1507). This operation stop period is a period set as a timing for shutting off the power supply in shipping inspection or the like. That is, in a shipping inspection or the like, the sound lamp control device 113 may determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 starts up normally based on power-on, and then the power is shut off and the next inspection may be performed. In such a case, it is conceivable to return to the next inspection after returning the accessory to the origin position, but if no operation stop period is provided (that is, the origin return operation ends, the accessory power supply return operation immediately In this case, the power supply must be shut off after waiting for the power supply return operation to be completed and the return of all the objects to the home position in each inspection. There is a fear. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the operation of the accessory is stopped for a predetermined period (one second) after the return to origin is completed, all the accessories are returned to the original by shutting off the power supply during the predetermined period. The power supply can be shut off while in the position. Therefore, inspection efficiency can be improved in shipping inspection and the like.

  When the processing of S1507 ends, the on-operation flag 223h is set to ON to indicate that it is the execution period of the power recovery operation (S1508), and this processing ends. In the process of S1504, if it is determined that the on-operation flag 223h is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the return to origin of the accessory has been completed. It is determined whether or not the operation stop period (1 second) has elapsed (S1509). If the operation stop period has not elapsed (S1509: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1509 that the operation stop period has elapsed (S1509: Yes), then the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the return pointer 223f (S1510), and the power recovery operation table 222d (FIG. 18), the data (specified contents) corresponding to the updated return pointer 223f is read (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the read data is END information (S1512). If it is determined that the read data is not END information (S1512: No), the data read from the power recovery operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) is added. Based on this, the driving of the accessory motor 229 is set (S1513), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1512 that the data read from the power recovery operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) is END information (S1512: Yes), both the initialization flag 223g and the input operation flag 223h are turned off. To indicate that the power recovery operation has ended (S1514), and the process ends.

  By executing this initial operation process (S1402), it is possible to perform the power recovery operation of the accessory based on power-on, so whether or not each accessory operates normally in the power recovery operation. Can be checked. Therefore, it can suppress that a player plays a game in the state where the accessory which operation | movement abnormality has generated remains.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the held ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special figure 1 held ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 ( N1) or the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In the process of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1608 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is the main control device when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize) and when a special symbol lottery is performed. 110, each time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled by the process of S1608. It can be set to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is different from the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Even if there is a deviation, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol is drawn, and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, and Special figure 2 It is possible to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d. When the processing of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1607, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1609). If an opening command is received (S1609: Yes), first, a display opening command is set (S1610). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1610 is completed, the operation pattern of the opening effect is set (S1611), and the process returns to the main process. Note that, as described above in the description of FIG. 19, in the opening effect, the operation of group 1 is set at the start of the effect. That is, a series of operations is set in which each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is moved to the extended position (see FIG. 26A) and moved to the origin position (see FIG. 5). Based on the operation set here, the operation start is set in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1410 in FIG. 40). Note that, as described above, as described above, at the timing at which an action of the accessory is to be started, the group of the accessory that is to start the operation specifies the operation condition specified in the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17). When it is determined that it is not satisfied (see S1407: No in FIG. 40), the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 is obtained by operating the accessory anew. ) Is exceeded (see S1409: Yes in FIG. 40), the operation start of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is canceled and an alternative effect is set (S1412 in FIG. 40). (See S1413).

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1609 (S1609: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1612). When the round number command is received (S1612: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1613), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1614), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1612 (S1612: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1615). If an ending command is received (S1615: Yes), a display ending command for notifying the display mode of the ending effect is set (S1616), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1615 (S1615: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1617). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1707. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, an operation pattern of the accessory corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the processing of S1703 is set (S1705). That is, the operation of the accessory is set based on the specified content of the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 19). Based on the operation set here, the operation start is set in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1410 in FIG. 40). Note that, as described above, at the timing at which an action of an accessory is to be started, it is determined that the group of actors whose operation is to be started does not satisfy the operation condition defined in the action start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17). In the case (see S1407: No in FIG. 40), it is determined that the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by newly operating the accessory. In the case (see S1409: Yes in FIG. 40), the operation start of the accessory for which the operation pattern is set in the processing of S1703 is canceled, and an alternative effect is set (see S1412, S1413 in FIG. 40).

  When the processing of S1705 ends, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1706). In the process of S1706, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1707.

  In the processing of S1707, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1707). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1707: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus this change display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1708), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1709).

  When the process of S1709 ends, the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1710), and based on the set stop type Then, a display stop type command for notifying to the display control device 114 is generated, set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S1711), and this processing is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. The processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power-on main image area 235a is started. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 55A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 46) is performed so that a power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) is drawn. 46 (b) S2108) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 46B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (a)) and the V interrupt process (FIG. 46 (b) are performed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. )).

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined according to each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 47, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in 3 symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Details of the stop type command process (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the task process (S2104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2403, is the stop type information (any one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / back out of reach, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command being a big hit stop type? (S2404), if it is a big hit stop type (S2404: Yes), the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) is notified of the start of transfer of image data used in the opening effect when it is on. The opening data transfer flag 223i is set to ON (S2405), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2404: No), the process of S2505 is skipped, the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the opening data transfer flag 223i, the image data used in the opening effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is performed. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the opening command for display instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the changing effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the display opening command is received. Therefore, if the image data used in the opening effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time is generated from the end of the changing effect until the opening effect is started, and the player can operate. There was a risk of anxiety about whether it was stopped or a sense of incongruity.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device In 81, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special jackpot” so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2206 that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a command opening command (S2208: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In this opening command process, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2505), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 16 rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds) can be started. ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2208 that there is no display opening command (S2208: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a round number command for use (S2210: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2210), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49B, details of the round number command processing (S2210) will be described. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no display round number command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and the display If there is an ending command (S2212: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d. (S2701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2702).

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2212 that there is no display ending command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214). If there is a change command (S2214: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of a back image change accompanying reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S2801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S2802, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 228 in 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive two or more back image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2214 that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2216). If (S2216: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the error type is an operation error of an accessory, information indicating which accessory has an error and a warning image indicating the content of the error that has occurred in the accessory are displayed. .

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2218), and the processing returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 48 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No) In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. In this pointer update process, the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), this processing is terminated, and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3206). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is written is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing for performing the confirmed display, so the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off in the processing of S3009 (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the processing of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether or not the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509).

  If the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 47). As a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is This means that it is determined that the jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 ends. That is, if the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), the opening data transfer flag is set to off (S3510), and then image data used in the opening effect is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the top address (storage source top address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the opening effect and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired. (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  In the process of S3509, if the opening data transfer flag is not on and is off (S3509: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3518). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in correspondence with the display data table. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending) necessary for drawing each sprite. The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated from the information, color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to have a plurality of performance-related actors that can be varied by driving the accessory motor 229. By making it variable according to the situation, various entertainment effects can be realized. Each of the accessory motors 229 for driving these accessories is configured to operate based on a load current supplied from the power supply device 115.

  The power supply device 115 has a specific current capacity (rated power) (in this embodiment, 7 A / 1750 W), and the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 is the current capacity (rated power). ), The pachinko machine 10 may shut down or the sound lamp control device 113 may stop operating. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to make the load current value (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 less than the current capacity (less than the rated power), a load reference value table 222c is provided, A value (drive load reference value) corresponding to the load current consumed when each accessory is varied is defined. When a new accessory is to be changed, a load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is supplied by newly changing the accessory based on the driving load reference value. If it is determined that it will be performed, the driving of the accessory is canceled. As a result, the object can be varied within the range of the current capacity or less (less than the rated power), so that the pachinko machine 10 may operate abnormally by supplying a load current exceeding the current capacity, It is possible to suppress a failure.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when operation | movement of an accessory is canceled, it is comprised so that the alternative effect corresponding to the accessory may be performed. This alternative effect is equivalent to the effect of changing the accessory even if the action of the accessory is canceled by displaying the display effect of the same system as the effect of changing the accessory on the 3rd symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the expectation of In addition, if you are trying to execute a composite effect of an accessory and a display image, simply canceling the operation of the accessory and leaving the display content as the composite effect will cause an unnatural display effect. There is a risk of becoming. For example, in the opening effect (see FIG. 26 (a)), if the operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is simply canceled, the center of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Only the character “congratulations” is displayed, and no display is made around the character, which makes the display unnatural. On the other hand, by preparing the above alternative effect that is completed only by display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the production of an unnatural display content. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to classify the actors into a plurality of groups and set the operation in units of groups. In addition, the combinations that make up each group are combinations that are in a positional relationship that does not interfere with each other. And when changing an accessory, when the operation | movement start conditions defined for every group are satisfy | filled, it is comprised. Specifically, the operation start condition is a condition for determining whether or not there is interference with another group and operating at a timing at which interference with the other group does not occur. Thereby, it can suppress that the actors of a different group interfere with each other, and can prevent the actors from being damaged by the impact of the collision between the actors. In addition, since the operation of the accessory is hindered by another accessory, the operation of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can be suppressed. If the group operation start condition is not satisfied, control is performed so as to cancel the operation start of the accessory and execute the above-described alternative effect. Thereby, even if the operation of the accessory is canceled, the player can have the same degree of expectation as the effect of changing the accessory. In addition, by preparing an alternative effect, it is possible to suppress the production of an unnatural display content, so it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect. it can.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation condition is set for each accessory, not the operation condition, and thus the design can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the designer who sets the operation of the accessory at the time of designing. Further, it is only necessary to prepare a table for setting operation conditions in units of groups, and it is not necessary to prepare a data table for setting operation conditions for each accessory. be able to. Therefore, the price of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the current capacity (rated power) is set as a threshold, and the operation start of the accessory is canceled when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded. It is not a thing. For example, a driving load reference value corresponding to 90% of the current capacity (rated power) is set as a threshold value, and the operation start of the accessory is canceled based on whether or not the total load current (power consumption) exceeds the threshold value. It may be configured to determine whether or not. By providing a margin of 10% with respect to the current capacity (rated power), the configuration included an accessory that would have a load current (power consumption) higher than the average due to individual variation of the accessory motor 229. However, it is possible to reliably operate the accessory within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that a load current (electric power) exceeding a predetermined threshold (7A / 1750W) is supplied, the operation start of the accessory that was newly operated is canceled. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 may be configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) by stopping the operation of a part of the accessory being operated. Also, by reducing the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 instead of stopping the operation of the accessory, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is reduced and the current capacity (rated power) is reduced. ).

  In addition, when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), the operation start and operation stop of each accessory is switched at a high speed, and the timings during operation are shifted from each other. Therefore, the load current (power consumption) may be less than the current capacity (less than the rated power). For example, when all the objects in group 1 and all the objects in group 3 to group 5 are moved simultaneously (that is, the sum of the drive load reference values becomes 110, and the current capacity is exceeded) In such a case, first, only the actors constituting the group 1 are operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second), and then the operation is stopped. And while stopping operation | movement of the accessory which comprises the group 1, operation | movement is stopped after operating the accessory which comprises the group 3-group 5 for predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second). Thereafter, group 1 and groups 3 to 5 are alternately operated for 0.1 seconds each. Thus, the load current (power consumption) corresponding to the drive load reference value 60 can be obtained during the operation period of the group 1, and the load corresponding to the drive load reference value 50 can be obtained during the operation period of the groups 3 to 5. Electric power (power consumption) can be used. Therefore, the load current (power) supplied to the accessory motor 229 can be set to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) while operating all the accessories to be operated. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in the pachinko machine 10 due to the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  In the present embodiment, when performing an opening effect or various variation effects, the actuated object to be operated is determined in advance according to the type of effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be determined by lottery. For example, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 29) in the main controller 110 and notified to the voice lamp controller 113 by the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp controller In 113, it may be configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to operate each accessory, and to set the operation of the accessory determined to be operated by the lottery. In the accessory control process (see FIG. 40), the accessory set here is determined as an accessory to start the operation (see S1406 in FIG. 40), satisfies the operation condition for each group (S1407: Yes), When the load current is equal to or less than the current capacity (S1409: No), the operation start is set (S1410).

  In addition, in the lottery for determining whether or not to move an accessory, the motion probability may be changed according to the variation pattern type (variation time), the special symbol lottery result (whether it is a big hit), the type of the accessory, or the like. . Specifically, for example, a variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot may be configured such that an accessory can be operated more easily than a variation pattern that is out of place, and a variation pattern with a long variation time may be configured more than a variation pattern with a short variation time. You may comprise so that an accessory may be operated easily. As a result, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased as more actors operate, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the priority order to operate for each accessory is determined and it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by operating the accessory, the load current (power consumption) below the current capacity (rated power) Until it becomes, it may be configured such that the operation is canceled in order from the low priority object (the high priority object is operated as much as possible). Moreover, you may change the priority which operates an accessory according to conditions (the kind of production, a variation pattern classification, the lottery result of a special symbol, etc.).

  In this modification, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), and whether or not the operation start of the accessory is cancelled. However, it is not always necessary. For example, in the case of a model in which the load current (power consumption) is less than the current capacity (rated power) even if all the types of actors that can be changed at the same time are operated, or the current capacity (rated power) When a sufficiently large power supply device 115 is employed, the determination of the load current (power consumption) can be omitted. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the load reference value table 222c of the ROM 222, the load value storage area 223e and the discriminant value storage area 223j of the RAM 223 can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when a new accessory is to be changed so that a load current exceeding the current capacity is not supplied by the power supply device 115, the active accessory, and a new It was configured to calculate a value corresponding to the sum of load currents when all of the objects to be operated were operated. Then, based on the calculated value, it is determined whether or not the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded. If it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, a new action to be performed is obtained. It was configured to cancel the start of operation. Accordingly, the load current (power) supplied to the accessory motor 229 is configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in order to illuminate the third symbol display device 81 instead of canceling the operation start of the accessory when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded. By suppressing the brightness (luminance) of the LCD backlight 230, the total load current (power consumption) consumed by the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is suppressed. By configuring in this way, each accessory can be operated without any limitation on the current capacity, so that the degree of freedom of the accessory operation can be increased.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that an LCD backlight 230 is added (the LCD backlight 230 is controlled by the audio lamp controller 113). In the sound lamp control device 113, the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed. In the sound lamp control device 113, part of the processing included in the start-up process (see FIG. 37) and the main process (see FIG. 39) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are described in the first embodiment. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. An LCD backlight 230 for illuminating the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the back side is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment. The LCD backlight 230 is composed of an LED light source. The RAM 223 included in the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a backlight flag 223k and a luminance reduction flag 223l in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment.

  The backlight flag 223k is a flag indicating that a process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 from a darker state to a normal brightness is being executed. More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the LCD backlight 230 is turned on based on power-on, the brightness is set to be darker than that in the normal game until the power-returning operation of the accessory is completed. It is configured. Thereby, even if it becomes the situation where operation | movement of the accessory by power supply return operation and operation | movement of the accessory based on another opportunity (for example, start of jackpot) must be performed simultaneously, the LCD backlight 230 is beforehand carried out. Since the load current (power consumption) that can be consumed by the accessory motor 229 can be increased by the amount of reduction of the load current (power consumption) consumed by the load, the load supplied from the power supply device 115 The current (power) can be set within the range of the current capacity (rated power). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the power recovery operation is completed, a process for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 set to dark luminance to normal luminance is performed. The backlight flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is an execution period of the brightness return process.

  When the backlight flag 223k is on, it indicates that the luminance return process is being executed, and when it is off, it is outside the return process execution period. The backlight flag 223k is set to ON when the power recovery operation is completed (see S1522 in FIG. 63), and is set to OFF when the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 returns to normal luminance ( (See S3805 in FIG. 65).

  The luminance reduction flag 223l causes the LCD backlight 230 to have a low luminance based on the determination that the total load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity (rated power). It is a flag indicating that the status is set. If the luminance reduction flag 230 is on, it indicates that the LCD backlight 230 is in a dark state, and if it is off, it indicates that the luminance is normal. This brightness reduction flag 223l is set to ON when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is darkened in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) described later (see S1427 in FIG. 62), and returns to the normal brightness. Is set to OFF (see S3706 in FIG. 64).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the transition of the LED current when the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is varied will be described by taking the power-on as an example. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a change over time in the LED current flowing in the LEDs constituting the LCD backlight 230. FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show examples in which the luminance is varied by different dimming methods, and both dimming methods can be employed.

  Here, conventionally, there are few kinds of accessories compared with recent gaming machines, and even if the accessories are operated freely, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. It never happened. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and the load current (electric power) consumed by operating the accessories has also increased. Therefore, when a plurality of objects are operated simultaneously, the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) may be consumed. In such a case, as a result of exceeding the specifications of the power supply device, the control device for controlling the accessory may shut down, the gaming machine itself may be turned off, or an operation abnormality of the accessory may occur. There was a possibility that a problem of stagnation would occur.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed by newly operating an accessory, FIG. ) Or using the dimming method illustrated in FIG. 59B, the luminance of the backlight 230 for the LCD is made dark. That is, by reducing the load current (power) consumed in the LCD backlight 230, the total current supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is ensured while ensuring the load current (power consumption) for newly operating the accessory. The load current (power consumption) is configured to be less than the current capacity (less than the rated power). Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation abnormality of the accessory Can be prevented from occurring.

  First, FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an example (current dimming method) of dimming the LCD backlight 230 by changing the absolute value of the LED current. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the LCD backlight 230 can be controlled, current cannot be supplied to the LEDs. The LED current is turned off (the current is 0). After that, when the LCD backlight 230 can be controlled, a current value (IL) lower than the current value (IH) set during the normal game is set as the LED current value for the LCD backlight 230. The By setting a lower current value than usual, it is possible to reduce the load current (power consumption) consumed by the LED, so the load current (power consumption) that can be supplied to the accessory motor 229 is increased. be able to. Further, by setting a current value lower than usual, the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 becomes darker than usual.

  The state where the luminance is reduced and the load current (power consumption) is reduced continues until the power recovery operation of the accessory is completed. This is because, in the power recovery operation, since a plurality of accessories operate, the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 tends to be a large value. In other words, if the operating conditions other than the power recovery operation are satisfied, the actors may operate in a complex manner and the load current (power consumption) may exceed the current capacity (rated power). By reducing the load current (power consumption) of the light 230, the total load current (power consumption) is prevented from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  In the present embodiment, the power-on brightness is configured to be 80% of the normal game brightness (that is, the current value IL is set to 80% of the current value IH). ) The value of 80% is a value that is set so that the total value of the load current (power consumption) is surely lower than the current capacity (rated power), even if each accessory operates in combination. Therefore, the number can be changed according to the number of accessories of the pachinko machine 10 (the number of accessory motors 229). For example, in a model with a small number of objects, even if a plurality of objects operate in combination, the amount of load current consumed is small, so the amount of reduction in load current (power consumption) in the LCD backlight 230 should be reduced. Can do. Therefore, the current value IL can be set high. On the other hand, in a model having a large number of accessories, if the load current (power consumption) is not reduced more in the LCD backlight 230, the current capacity may be exceeded. Therefore, in this case, the current value IL may be set to a lower value to ensure that the current capacity (rated power) is lower.

  When the power recovery operation of the accessory is completed, the current value is gradually increased over a predetermined period so that the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 becomes a normal luminance. Specifically, the current value is increased by 1% every second, so that the luminance during normal gaming is obtained over 20 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize a change in luminance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 from changing greatly by giving a large change in luminance in a short period of time and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  After returning to the normal luminance, the normal luminance is maintained until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off unless it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. Then, after the power is shut off, the LED current cannot be supplied to the LCD backlight 230, so that the LED current is turned off. Then, after the power is turned off, the LED current is turned off until the power is turned on next time.

  FIG. 59B is a diagram showing an example of dimming the LCD backlight 230 by setting the LED current value to a fixed value and changing the ratio between the on period and the off period of the LED current. Hereinafter, the dimming method shown in FIG. 59B is referred to as a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) pulse dimming method.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the power is turned on and the LCD backlight 230 can be controlled, IH is set as the LED current and the LED is turned on and off repeatedly. . The LED is turned on and off repeatedly at a constant frequency (for example, 320 Hz). Further, in one cycle composed of one set of on-period and off-period, the length of the on-period is set to 80% of one cycle, and the length of the off-period is set to 20% of one cycle. .

  Here, the setting of the on period and the off period means that a lighting control command including data indicating the length of the on period and data indicating the frequency is output to a known LED driver. The LED driver is configured to be able to switch between an on period and an off period of the LCD backlight 230 based on the received lighting control command. For example, when a lighting control command indicating that the ON period is 80% and the frequency is 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the LED operation is 80% ON period of one period (1/320 seconds) and one period. The 20% off period is repeatedly set by the LED driver. This operation is continued until a new lighting control command is received.

  A method for designating the ON period by the lighting control command output to the LED driver will be described more specifically. The above-described data indicating the length of the on period (lighting rate data) is composed of data of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), it means 0% lighting rate, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal notation), it means 100% lighting rate. Also, the lighting rate is set to increase at equal intervals as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting state is 50% (that is, 128/255).

  The reference signal (synchronization signal) that serves as a reference for the LED lighting frequency can be generated by the LED driver itself (set to free run) or input from the outside of the LED driver. The synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can be used. Whether to run free or use an external synchronization signal can be specified by a lighting control command. When an external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set a lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

  Further, the position of the on period can be changed by a lighting control command in one cycle in which the LED is turned on and off. That is, the LED on period can be set simultaneously with the detection of the synchronization signal, and the LED off period can be set after the end of the on period. For example, the LED off period can be set simultaneously with the detection of the synchronization signal, An on-period can be set after the period ends.

  A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of the on period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the on period is specified by 8-bit data, for example. More specifically, one period is divided into 255 equal parts, and it is possible to designate from which section the on-period is started by 8-bit data. For example, if the data specifying the position of the on period is 00H, the on period is started from the first section of one period divided into 255 equal parts (that is, simultaneously with the start of one period). If the data specifying the position of the on period is 1EH (that is, 30 in decimal notation), the on period starts from the 31st section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts.

  Thus, the LED driver for controlling the LED of this embodiment is configured to be able to accept a lighting control command including a plurality of data. Although illustration is omitted, the lighting control command is defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in association with the set timing. For example, as the lighting control command to be set when the power is turned on, the ON period is 80%, the lighting frequency is 320 Hz, and the start position of the ON period is specified as the first section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts. Data is specified.

  Note that the LED driver is not limited to receiving the lighting control command in the above-described manner. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the ON period with a simpler lighting control command may be employed. For example, you may use the LED driver which can receive the lighting control command which matched the lighting state of each area at the time of dividing one period into 8 equally with respect to each bit of 8-bit data. Specifically, in order from the least significant bit, sections that are earlier in time are associated, a section corresponding to a bit of 1 data is turned on, and a section corresponding to a bit of 0 is turned off. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), among the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight equal parts, the first three sections are turned on and the latter five sections are turned off. Thereby, since the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver can be simplified, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 59B, the description will be continued. The frequency at which the LED is turned on and off (lighting frequency) is a sufficiently high frequency (for example, 320 Hz) such that the on period and the off period cannot be distinguished visually. Therefore, the luminance perceived by the player is the luminance obtained by averaging (integrating) the 80% on-period and the 20% off-period (that is, the normal luminance of 80%). The state in which the ON period is 80% continues until the power supply returning operation of the accessory is completed. Then, when the power recovery operation of the accessory is completed, the length of the ON period is gradually increased over a predetermined period. Specifically, the length of the on period is increased by 1% every time 1 second elapses, and the on period is controlled to be 100% after 20 seconds. Thereby, similarly to the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 from changing greatly by giving a large change in luminance in a short period of time and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  After the LED on-period becomes 100% and returns to normal brightness, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off unless the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. Normal brightness continues to be maintained. Then, after the power is shut off, the LED current cannot be supplied to the LCD backlight 230, so that the LED current is turned off. Then, after the power is turned off, the LED current is turned off until the power is turned on next time.

  In the case of the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), it is only necessary to be able to switch between the LED current on state (current value IH state) and the off state. A circuit having a configuration can be employed. That is, since a relatively inexpensive driver can be employed, the price of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59 (a)), it is necessary to adopt an LED driver that can set the LED current value to a plurality of values, but more when the luminance is reduced by the same ratio. There is a merit that it is possible to reduce the power. This is because the power consumption of the LED is proportional to both the LED current value and the anode voltage. That is, in order to make the LED current value 80%, it is necessary to lower the anode voltage, so the power consumption is 80% of the normal game due to the LED current decrease (20%) and the anode voltage decrease. Less than. On the other hand, in the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), when the LED current is on, the current value is always IH, and the anode voltage does not change. Therefore, the power reduction rate relative to the power during normal gaming is simple. Is proportional to the lighting rate. Therefore, the electric power is 80% of that in the normal game, and the current dimming method has a larger decrease in power with respect to the electric power in the normal game. Therefore, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved by adopting the current dimming method.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This startup process is a process that is started when the power is turned on, as in the startup process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37).

  Of these startup processes, the same processes as S1101 to S1112 of the startup process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are executed in the processes of S1101 to S1112. In the start-up process (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, when the initial setting of the RAM 203 is executed by the process of S1111, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is then set to 80% of the brightness during the normal game. (S1121). Here, as a method of setting the luminance to 80%, a current dimming method (see FIG. 59A) or a PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B) may be adopted. . Further, a method different from these methods (for example, a method of performing PWM dimming after reducing the LED current value to some extent) may be used.

  By reducing the load current (power consumption) in advance by reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230, the load current (power consumption) is summed even if a large number of objects are operated in the power recovery operation. Can be prevented from exceeding the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, it can suppress that a malfunction arises in the pachinko machine 10 by exceeding current capacity (rated power). When the process of S1121 is completed, interrupt permission is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 61).

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Of these main processes (see FIG. 61), the processes of S1301 to S1310 and S1312 to S1318 execute the same processes as the processes of S1301 to S1310 and S1312 to S1318 of the main process in the first embodiment, respectively. Is done. And in the main process (refer FIG. 61) in 2nd Embodiment, when the process of S1310 is complete | finished, the accessory control process 2 for setting the operation | movement start and operation | movement stop of each accessory is performed (S1321). . Next, after the power supply restoration operation of the accessory is completed, a backlight control process, which is a process for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to the luminance during the normal game, is executed (S1322), and the process proceeds to S1312. And migrate. Details of these accessory control process 2 (S1321) and backlight control process (S1322) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64 and FIG. 65, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the accessory control process 2 (S1321) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this accessory control process (S1321). This accessory control process 2 (S1321) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. And a process for setting the operation stop.

  Among the accessory control process 2 (S1321), in each process of S1401, S1403, S1406, S1407, S1409, S1412, and S1413, the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment (S1401, S1403). , S1406, S1407, S1409, S1412, and S1413 are executed in the same manner.

  In the accessory control process 2 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is on (S1401: Yes), the accessory control process according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 40). The initial operation process 2 is executed instead of the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) (S1421). This initial operation process 2 (S1421) is a process for setting a recovery operation of an accessory, similarly to the initial operation process (see FIG. 41). Details of the initial operation process 2 (S1421) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the accessory control process 2 of the present embodiment, in the process of S1403, when it is determined that there is an accessory for which operation stop should be set, the accessory action is a process for setting the action stop of the accessory. A stop process is executed (S1422). Details of this accessory operation stop process (S1422) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the accessory control process 2 of the present embodiment, after the processing of S1409 is completed, the drive load corresponding to the accessory to be started is added to the drive load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e. Then, the value is updated as a new drive load total value (S1423). And it is discriminate | determined whether the updated value (driving load total value) is larger than 100 (S1424), and when it is discriminating that it is 100 or less (S1424: No), this process will be complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the total drive load value is greater than 100 (S1424: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on (S1425). If it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is on as a result of the determination in S1425 (S1425: Yes), the power recovery operation of the accessory is not completed (that is, the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 has already been increased). This process is terminated as it is. In the process of S1425, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1425: No), the load is set by setting the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to 80% during the normal game. The current (power consumption) is reduced (S1426), the luminance reduction flag 223l is set to ON (S1427), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 61).

  In the accessory control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), when it is determined that the total of the drive load reference values exceeds 100, the load value storage area 223e has not been updated. In the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62), when there is an accessory to be newly operated, the load value storage area 223e is updated regardless of whether or not the total of the drive load reference values exceeds 100 (that is, In addition, a value larger than 100 is also stored as the driving load total value) (see S1423). This is because the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to always operate the accessory even if the total driving load value exceeds 100. As described above, when the total driving load exceeds 100, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is always configured to operate within a current capacity (rated power) or less. Therefore, when the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from malfunctioning or malfunctioning.

  Next, an initial operation process 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process 2 (S1421). This initial operation process 2 (S1421) is a process executed in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and the initial operation process (see FIG. 62). This is a process for setting the return operation of an accessory as in (40).

  Among the initial operation processing 2 (S1421), in each processing of S1501 to S1514, the same processing as that of S1501 to S1514 of the initial operation processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment is executed.

  In the initial operation process 2 (S1421) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1512 that the data read from the power recovery operation table 222d is END information (S1512: Yes), the LCD backlight 230 is displayed. Is set to increase by 1% (S1521). That is, when the power is turned on, the LCD backlight 230 that has been set to have a luminance of 80% of the luminance during normal gaming is controlled to have a luminance of 81%. Specifically, in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), the LED current value flowing through the LED of the LCD backlight 230 is increased by 1%. In the case of the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), the ON period is increased by 1%, and 81% of the one period composed of one set of ON period and OFF period is the ON period. Thus, 19% is set to be the off period.

  When the setting of the LCD backlight 230 is completed by the process of S1521, the backlight flag 223k is set to ON (S1522), and the process proceeds to S1514. When the backlight flag 223k is turned on in the processing of S1522, the power supply restoration operation of the accessory is completed, and it is indicated that it is the execution period of the processing for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to the normal luminance. . Therefore, thereafter, the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is controlled to increase by 1% every time one second elapses. Note that controlling the luminance to gradually increase over a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds) makes the change in luminance less noticeable to the player, This is to prevent the appearance of the 3rd symbol display device 81 from feeling uncomfortable. In other words, when the brightness is instantaneously set to the brightness in the normal game (that is, when the brightness is increased by 20%) at the time when the power recovery operation is completed, the game is based on a sudden change in the brightness. This is intended to prevent a person from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the accessory operation stop process (S1422) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this accessory operation stop process (S1422). This accessory operation stop process (S1422) is a process executed in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This is a process for stopping the operation of the object.

  In this accessory operation stop process (S1422), first, in the process of S1403 of the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62), the operation stop of the accessory that is determined to be stopped is set, and the accessory operation is also performed. In the flag 223i, 0 is set to the bit corresponding to the accessory for which the operation stop is set (S3701). Next, the driving load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which the operation stop is set by the processing of S3701 is subtracted from the driving load total value stored in the load reference value table 222c, and the value after the subtraction is a new driving load total. The load reference value table 222c is overwritten as a value (S3702).

  When the processing of S3702 is completed, processing (S3703 to S3706) for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to the luminance during normal game is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on (S3703). In the process of S3703, if the initialization flag 223g is on (S3703), it means that the power supply returning operation of the accessory has not been completed, and the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is set to 80% during the normal game. Since there is no need to change it as it is, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223g is off (S3703: No), then whether or not the luminance reduction flag 223l is on (that is, when the function stopped this time is started, the LCD back Whether or not the luminance of the light 230 has been reduced to 80%) is determined (S3704), and if the luminance reduction flag 223l is off (S3704: No), it means that the luminance is in the normal game. Since it is not necessary to perform the process of returning the luminance, this process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S3704 that the luminance reduction flag 223l is on (S3704: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the total drive load value updated in the process of S3702 is 100 or less (S3705). ). In the process of S3705, if it is determined that the total drive load value is greater than 100 (S3705), if the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is returned to the brightness during normal gaming, the load current (power consumption) May exceed the current capacity (rated power), and thus the process is terminated without changing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 from 80%.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3705, if it is determined that the updated drive load total value is 100 or less (S3705: Yes), even if the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is returned to the luminance during normal gaming, Since there is no possibility of exceeding the capacity (rated power), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is set to the brightness during the normal game (S3706), and this process ends.

  Next, the backlight control process (S1322) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the backlight control process (S1322). This backlight control process (S1322) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This is a process for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to the luminance during normal gaming after the completion.

  In this backlight control process (S1322), first, it is determined whether or not the backlight flag 223k is on (S3801). If it is determined that the backlight flag 223k is off (S3801: No), the power supply recovery operation of the accessory is performed. This means that it is not the execution period of the brightness return process based on the end of the process, and thus this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3801 that the backlight flag 223k is on (S3801: Yes), then whether or not one second has elapsed since the last time the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 was changed. (S3802), if it is determined that one second has not elapsed (S3802: No), the process is terminated because it is not the timing to increase the luminance of the LCD backlight 230.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3802 that one second has elapsed since the last change of the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 (S3802: Yes), the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is increased by 1% ( S3803). Next, it is determined whether or not the increased luminance has reached 100% (that is, the luminance during normal game) (S3804). If the luminance has not reached 100% (S3804: No), the subsequent luminance is also determined. In order to continue the process of gradually increasing the process, this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S3804 that the brightness is 100% (the brightness is in the normal game) (S3804: Yes), the backlight flag 223k is set to off (S3805), The process ends.

  By performing this backlight control process (see FIG. 65), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is gradually increased (by 1% per second) after the completion of the power recovery operation of the accessory, and for 20 seconds. Can be used to return to the normal game brightness. Thus, by changing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 in a stepwise manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 by making the player recognize the change in luminance.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by newly operating the accessory, or the power supply of the accessory is restored based on power-on. By reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 during the operation execution period, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is set within the range of the current capacity (rated power). Yes. As a result, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the operation of the accessory It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an abnormality.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, even if the total driving load value exceeds 100, the action of the accessory is not canceled, so there is no need to prepare an alternative effect. Therefore, the storage capacity for storing the substitute effect can be omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to gradually increase the luminance to return to the luminance in the normal game when the power supply returning operation of the accessory is completed, but is not limited thereto. Even after the power-return operation of the accessory is finished, the brightness is gradually increased when the reduced brightness is returned to the normal game again when it is determined that the total drive load value exceeds 100. Also good. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the change in luminance.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to immediately increase the luminance of the normal game to the luminance of the normal game only when it is determined that the total drive load value exceeds 100 and the reduced luminance is returned to the luminance of the normal game again. However, even when the power recovery operation of the accessory is completed, it may be immediately increased to the luminance during the normal game. As a result, the period during which the luminance is dark can be shortened, so that the appearance quality of the third symbol display device can be improved. Further, in the case of immediately increasing to the luminance during the normal game, a black image of the entire screen may be displayed as a video at the timing of changing the luminance. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to perceive the luminance change of the LCD backlight 230, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by recognizing the luminance change. be able to. Note that, for the same reason as when the luminance is increased, a black image of the entire screen may be displayed even at the timing when the luminance is reduced. If the liquid crystal display used in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is of a system in which the transmittance is minimal (ie, a black image) in the absence of an applied voltage to the liquid crystal, the player will notice a change in brightness. In addition to the effect of making it harder to be generated, the power consumption of the driver for driving the liquid crystal can also be reduced.

  As the liquid crystal display, a liquid crystal display having a maximum transmittance (that is, a white image) in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal may be employed. In this case, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, a white image is displayed to reduce the power of the driver that drives the liquid crystal and secure a margin for the current capacity (rated power). It may be configured.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to operate all the objects that are determined to be operated. However, the control and driving for reducing the load current (power consumption) by reducing the luminance of the backlight 230 for LCD. The control for canceling the start of operation may be made to coexist for all or part of the accessory to be performed. Moreover, you may give priority to control. For example, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the brightness is first reduced to a predetermined value (for example, 90% during normal gaming). When it is determined that it exceeds the maximum value, the operation of the accessory to be driven may be stopped. Thereby, it can suppress that the brightness of the appearance of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 becomes too dark.

  In this embodiment, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced when the power is turned on and when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by driving the accessory. Although configured to reduce load current (power consumption), it is not limited to these. For example, the LCD backlight 230 may be configured to be controllable in the display control device 114, and the backlight brightness may be adjusted according to the type of video displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, in an image with a low APL (Average Picture Level) (an image having a relatively large number of pixels of relatively low gradation), the load current (power consumption) is reduced by reducing the luminance. You may comprise. By reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 in an image with a low APL, the luminance of black can be reduced, so that an image with good contrast (an image with a tight black) can be obtained. Further, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved. Further, for example, when a full-screen black image is detected as an image, the LCD backlight 230 may be turned off. This is because it is useless to keep the LCD backlight 230 lit even though no video is displayed. Thereby, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved.

  Further, if there is room for increasing the gain of the video according to the histogram of the video, the gain of the video may be increased instead of greatly reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230. Specifically, for example, when a video histogram is determined and it is determined that the video is composed only of pixels having a pixel level of 50% or less, the video gain is increased to double the pixel level of all pixels. Instead of reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 may be reduced without changing the apparent brightness. As a result, the load current (power consumption) can be further reduced and the apparent brightness can be secured as compared with the case where the LCD backlight 230 is simply darkened according to the image.

  In the present embodiment, when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced, the entire third symbol display device 81 is controlled to be dark. However, a plurality of areas are defined in the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, an LCD backlight 230 for illuminating each area may be provided, and the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 may be controlled for each area. Then, when the accessory moves, the accessory shields part or all of the third symbol display device 81, and in the third symbol display device 81, when the player becomes difficult to visually recognize the shielded portion, The LCD backlight 230 that illuminates an area that is difficult to visually recognize may be turned off. For example, the LCD backlight 230 that illuminates the center area of the screen is turned off when the standing object 410 or the central swinging object 820 moves to the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 that is the extended position. You may comprise. As a result, the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity (rated power) can be achieved without diminishing the brightness of the portion that is visible to the player.

  Further, in the case of controlling the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 for each region, the luminance of the entire screen is reduced by the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), and the LED current off period is reduced for each region. You may comprise so that it may shift. That is, the ON period of one region may be configured to coincide with the OFF period of a region other than that region. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the current (power) of the LCD backlight 230 from increasing instantaneously at the timing when the ON periods of all the regions overlap. Therefore, it is possible to suppress exceeding the current capacity (rated power) not only as an average value of load current (power consumption) but also as an instantaneous value.

  In the present embodiment, in the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)), the dimming frequency is set to 320 Hz. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the frequency is difficult to recognize the period (that is, flicker does not occur), the frequency may be higher than 320 Hz (for example, 400 Hz) or may be lower (for example, 200 Hz).

  In this embodiment, during normal games, it is determined whether or not the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded. If the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the brightness is reduced to reduce the load current (power consumption). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation pattern of the LCD backlight 230 may be determined in advance according to the effect, and the LCD backlight 230 may be operated according to the operation pattern. For example, in out-of-bounds super-reach and shared super-reach, it is configured to reduce the load current (power consumption) by reducing the brightness when 8 seconds or 15 seconds elapse, which is the operation timing of an accessory. May be. Thereby, the load current (power consumption) can be set within the range of the current capacity (rated power). In this case, the luminance is gradually lowered before the operation timing of the accessory (for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the production), and the operation timing of the accessory (when 8 seconds and 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the production). The brightness may be the darkest (for example, 80% brightness). Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance, and thus it is possible to prevent the player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable with the effect.

  Alternatively, only the operation pattern of the LCD backlight 230 may be determined in advance, and a combination to be operated at each operation timing may be selected by lottery. For example, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 29) in the main controller 110 and notified to the voice lamp controller 113 by the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp controller In 113, each accessory is operated at the operation timing of the accessory determined for each variation pattern (for example, in the case of special reach, at the time of 8 seconds, 15 seconds, and 25 seconds from the start of the production). It may be configured to execute the lottery of whether or not and set the operation of the accessory determined to be operated by the lottery. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the brightness | luminance of the backlight 230 for LCD may be reduced according to the operation timing of the accessory provided for every production. As a method of reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230, for example, a method of reducing the luminance by gradually decreasing the luminance from a few seconds before the operation timing of the accessory, or a full screen as an image at the operation timing of the accessory And a method of reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the target brightness at once. As a result, it is possible to realize various performance effects of the accessory while keeping the total load current (power consumption) supplied to the pachinko machine 10 within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

  In the present embodiment, the backlight brightness is reduced to 80% of the normal game brightness, but the load current (power consumption) of the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded. You may comprise so that the brightness | luminance set according to a value may be varied. For example, when the current capacity (rated power) exceeds 30% or more (that is, the driving load total value is 130 or more), the luminance is set to 80% during normal game, and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is If it is 20% to 30% (that is, if the total value of the driving load is in the range of 120 to 130), the luminance is 85% and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is 10% to 20%. In some cases (that is, when the total value of the driving load is within the range of 110 to 120), the luminance is 90%, and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is less than 10% (that is, the driving load). If the total value is less than 110), the luminance may be 95%. Thereby, since the reduction in luminance can be suppressed to the minimum, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the apparent brightness of the third symbol display device 81 has decreased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the pachinko machine that includes only the accessory that operates between the retreat position (origin position) and the overhang position and the accessory that rotates or swings from the origin position as a starting point. 10 has been described.

  On the other hand, in 3rd Embodiment, the accessory which can perform opening / closing operation | movement and lighting operation in combination is included in a structure. In other words, the composition includes an effect object having a member that opens and closes and a light source provided inside the member that opens and closes. Visible. In this way, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by including in the configuration an accessory that can execute a complex operation. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of the configuration. In the sound lamp control device 113, the configuration of the RAM 223 is changed, the startup process (see FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 221 and the main process (see FIG. 39). The included partial processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 66, the game board 13 in this embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 66, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64 with respect to the front view. The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state. (Enlarged state) and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640 easily.

  Next, the operation unit 300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, the operation unit 300 includes a rear case 310 formed in a box shape in which one surface side is opened from a bottom wall portion 311 and an outer wall portion 312 standing from an outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311. Prepare. The back case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 311a at the center of the bottom wall portion 311 thereof. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 66) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 300, four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 that perform an opening / closing operation and a lighting operation in combination are provided in the inner space of the back case 310. As shown in FIG. 67, the hemispherical accessory 910 is provided on the upper right of the opening 311a in the front view, and the hemispherical accessory 920 is provided on the upper left of the opening 311a in the front view. Further, the hemispherical accessory 930 is provided at the lower right of the opening 311a in front view, and the hemispherical accessory 940 is provided at the lower left of the opening 311a in front view.

  In addition, the composite operation unit 1000 is accommodated in the internal space of the back case 310. The composite operation unit 1000 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the back case 310, and is bottomed in a manner surrounded by the outer wall portion 312 while abutting the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312. Arranged on the wall 311. In the assembled state (see FIG. 67), the combined operation unit 1000 is formed with a rectangular opening at a position that coincides with the opening 311a of the rear case 310 when viewed from the front.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, an outline of an operation mode of the combined operation unit 1000 will be described. FIG. 68 is a front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 68 illustrates a state in which the pair of half-moon shaped objects 1060 of the combined operation unit 1000 are arranged at the overhang position.

  In the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 67, the pair of meniscus members 1060 of the combined operation unit 1000 are retracted above and below the opening 311a of the back case 310, and are not visible to the player (FIG. 66). reference). On the other hand, in the overhanging position shown in FIG. 68, the pair of half-moon shaped objects 1060 is slid in a direction facing each other, and the pair of half-moon shaped objects 1060 is located at the center of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (ie, the third pattern). It is arranged in front of the display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Each of these hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 and the combined operation unit 1000 are formed so as to be able to operate independently, and are arranged in a stacked state (stacked) as described above. Therefore, for the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940, and the composite operation unit 1000 that are arranged in different layers, for example, the operation member is inward of the opening 311 a of the back case 310. Even those that overhang can be operated simultaneously. That is, not only each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940, and combined operation unit 1000 can be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 1000, the retracted position (origin position) and the extended position of the pair of slide members 1020 are formed as the end of the movable range of the pair of slide members 1020.

  Next, the combined operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (a) and 69 (b) are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 1000. FIG. In FIG. 69A, the slide member 1020 and the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 are disposed at the retracted position, and in FIG. 69B, the slide member 1020 and the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 are disposed at the extended position. Is illustrated. In addition, the protruding position of the slide member 1020 and the half-moon shaped object 1060 is formed as an end located on the opposite side of the retracted position in the end of the movable range of the slide member 1020.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pair of slide members 1020 of the combined operation unit 1000 are slid up and down, and the half-moon shaped object 1060 rotates 180 degrees in the course of the slide movement. That is, the pair of half-moon shaped objects 1060 are stationary at the retracted position (see FIG. 69 (a)) with the semicircular arc sides facing each other toward the other half-moon shaped object 1060. Then, in the process of being slid up and down by the slide member 1020, it rotates around a rotation axis oriented in a direction perpendicular to the plane including the game board 13 and is semicircular with respect to the other half-moon shaped object 1060. Rotate until the straight part (string part) is turned. In the overhang position (see FIG. 69 (b)), since the straight portions (string portions) of the pair of upper and lower half-moon shaped objects are in contact with each other, the pair of semicircular shaped objects 1060 are combined. It has a circular shape. Further, when the semicircle-shaped accessory 1060 is moved to the extended position, the nail-like accessory 1063 housed inside the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is normally exposed to the outside of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060. Operate. Four claw-like objects 1063 are provided for each half-moon-shaped object 1060, and are arranged at equal intervals on the arc portion of the half-moon-shaped object 1060.

  Next, the structure of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. The hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 all have the same structure. Therefore, here, the hemispherical object 910 will be described as an example, and the other hemispherical objects 920, 930, The description of 940 will be omitted.

  FIG. 70A is a front perspective view when the hemispherical accessory 910 is taken out from the operation unit 300. FIG. The hemispherical accessory 910 includes a light source 231 for the accessory, and a light emitting portion 911 that can emit light by turning on or off the accessory light source 231 and a pair of upper and lower opening / closing portions that can be opened and closed. 912a, 912b and a plurality of gears 913a, 913b, 913c, 913d, 913e for transmitting the power of the accessory motor 229 to the opening / closing portions 912a, 912b are provided.

  The state of FIG. 70 (a) shows a state where the opening / closing parts 912a, 912b are opened to the maximum extent, and the opening / closing part 912a is driven by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the hemispherical accessory 910. Can be changed to a downward direction, and the opening / closing part 912b can be changed downward to be in a closed state. When the opening / closing sections 912a and 912b are closed, the light emitting section 911 is invisible to the player (see FIG. 67).

  FIG. 70 (b) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory 910. The gear 913a and the gear 913b are fixed (adhered) to the opening / closing portion 912b and the opening / closing portion 912a, respectively, and the opening / closing portions 912b and 912a perform an opening / closing operation in conjunction with the rotation amount of the gears 913a and 913b. It is configured as follows. The opening / closing part 912b is provided with a light shielding plate 916. Although details will be described later, the light shielding plate 916 is used to determine the degree of opening / closing of the opening / closing portion 912b. Since the light shielding plate 916 is fixed to the opening / closing portion 912b, it operates in conjunction with the operation of the opening / closing portion 912b.

  A light shielding sensor 915 is provided behind the gear 913a. The light shielding sensor 915 is a sensor for determining whether or not the position of the opening / closing portion 912b is on the closed state side (lower side than the specific position) with respect to the specific position (see FIG. 71C). Although details will be described later, based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor 915, it is determined that the opening / closing part 912b is on the closed state side (lower side than the specific position) with respect to the specific position (see FIG. 71C). In this case, when it is determined that the light emitting unit 911 is turned off and is in the open state side (above the specific position) with respect to the specific position (see FIG. 71C), the light emitting unit 911 is turned on. It is configured. When light shielding by the light shielding plate 916 is detected by the light shielding sensor 915, it is determined that the opening / closing portion 912b is on the closed state side (lower side than the specific position) with respect to the specific position (see FIG. 71C). .

  Here, as in the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 mounted on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an object that operates the opening and closing unit and the light emitting unit in a composite manner (composite operation agent). Has existed in the past. In addition, as a method for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the composite operating combination, there is a control for extinguishing based on whether or not the opening / closing part is completely closed. However, in this conventional control, if the opening / closing part is open even a little, the light emitting part remains lit, so in the state where the opening / closing part just before closing is slightly open, The light from the light emitting part leaked out. That is, there is a problem in that the visual quality of the composite operating agent is poor. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the light-blocking sensor 915 detects that the opening / closing part 912b has reached the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)) (that is, before the opening / closing parts 912a, 912b are completely closed). In addition, since the light emitting unit can be turned off, it is possible to prevent light leakage in a state where there is a slight gap between the opening / closing units 912a and 912b, and to prevent hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940's appearance quality is improved.

  FIG. 70 (c) is a front view of the hemispherical accessory 910. As shown in FIG. 70 (c), when the open / close sections 912a and 912b are opened to the maximum extent, the entire light emitting section 911 is visible from the front side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the opening / closing operation | movement of the opening-and-closing part 912a, 912b of the hemispherical accessory 910 is demonstrated. 71 (a) is a view showing a state where the opening / closing portions 912a, 912b are opened to the maximum extent, and FIG. 71 (b) is a view showing a state where the opening / closing portions 912a, 912b are opened about half way, FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing a case where the opening / closing part 912b is at the specific position (detection start position of the light shielding sensor 915) described above, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the state made.

  As shown in FIGS. 71A to 71D, the open / close sections 912a and 912b operate so that their positions are always symmetrical vertically. The opening / closing members 912a and 912b operate in a positive direction (opening direction) or a negative direction (closing direction) with respect to the accessory motor 229 with a specific position as a reference position (position where the number of steps is 0). The number of steps is set. Specifically, in order to operate (open) from the position of FIG. 71 (c) to the position of FIG. 71 (a), it is necessary to operate the accessory motor 229 in the positive direction by 25 steps (25 degrees). . On the other hand, in order to operate (close) from the position of FIG. 71 (c) to the position of FIG. 71 (d), it is necessary to operate the accessory motor 229 in the negative direction by 5 steps (5 degrees). That is, when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are changed from the completely closed state to the completely opened state, the accessory motor 229 that has been advanced five steps in the negative direction is moved in the positive direction. It is only necessary to operate 30 steps and advance the number of steps by 25 steps in the positive direction. Further, when changing from a fully opened state to a completely closed state, the accessory motor 229 that has been advanced 25 steps in the positive direction is operated 30 steps in the negative direction, What is necessary is just to make it the state which advanced 5 steps in the negative direction as a step number. Thus, by managing the operation of the opening / closing sections 912a, 912b by the number of steps starting from the origin position, the opening / closing sections 912a, 912b can be arranged in a desired manner.

  As the opening / closing portion 912b of the accessory motor 229 moves toward the closed state (upper side), the light shielding plate 916 moves downward (see FIGS. 71A and 71B). The operation of the light shielding plate 916 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light shielding sensor 915 and the light shielding plate 916. 72 (a) to 72 (d) show the states of the light shielding sensor 915 and the light shielding plate 916 when the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state of FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d), respectively. It is a figure.

  The light shielding sensor 915 is provided with a light shielding detector 915a (see FIG. 72A), and it is determined whether or not the light shielding plate 916 overlaps the light shielding detector 915a (whether it is shielded). The output of the sensor 916 is changed (set to the H output state). In the state of FIGS. 72A and 72B, the light shielding sensor 916 is in the L output state because the light shielding detector 915a and the light shielding plate 916 do not overlap. When the arrangement shown in FIG. 72 (c) (that is, when the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), a part of the light shielding detector 915a is blocked by the light shielding plate 916. The light shielding sensor 915 is set to the H output state. The position where the light shielding sensor 915 starts detection is set as the origin position of the opening / closing sections 912a and 912b. In addition, this origin position is a return position when the origin return operation is executed based on power-on, but when the operation of the opening / closing sections 912a and 912b is completed during normal game, the origin position is closed beyond this origin position. It will be in a state (refer to Drawing 71 (d)).

  Even when the opening / closing parts 912a and 912b are fully closed from the origin position to the closed state side, the state where the light shielding detection part 915a is blocked by the light shielding plate 916 continues (see FIG. 72 (d)). ). In other words, while the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state shown in FIG. 71 (d) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (c), the output of the light shielding sensor 916 is always in the H state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the arrangement of the light shielding sensor 916 and the light shielding plate 915 and the output of the light shielding sensor 916 will be described in association with each other. 73 shows the positional relationship between the light shielding sensor 916 and the light shielding plate 915, and the lower side of FIG. 73 shows the output of the light shielding sensor 915 in each positional relationship.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the open / close portions 912a and 912b are completely opened (see FIG. 71 (a)), the output of the light shielding sensor 916 is in the L state. Then, when the opening / closing parts 912a and 912b are changed to the closed state side and the light shielding plate 916 blocks the part of the light shielding detection part 915a (see FIG. 71 (c)), the output of the light shielding sensor 916. Rises to the H state. The state in which the output is H does not change even when the opening / closing sections 912a and 912b are completely closed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, during the normal game, the light emitting unit 911 is turned off while the output of the light shielding sensor 915 is in the H state, and the light emission is performed when the output of the light shielding sensor 915 is in the L state. The part 911 is turned on. That is, when closing the open / close sections 912a and 912b that were in the open state (see FIG. 71 (a)), the light emitting section is in a stage where it has reached a specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)) before being completely closed. 911 can be turned off.

  If the light emitting unit 911 is kept on lighting until the opening / closing parts 912a, 912b are completely closed, in a state immediately before closing (a state where a slight gap is generated between the opening / closing part 912a and the opening / closing part 912b). In addition, since the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, the light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the appearance quality is deteriorated.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, four hemispherical objects are provided, but the period and the number of steps until each of the objects is closed due to individual variation or the like are not always the same. Under such circumstances, a situation may occur in which the opening / closing part is closed first only for some of the four hemispherical features. In this case, since the hemispherical object whose closing is slower than the others is in a state where light leaks from a slight gap formed before the opening and closing part is closed, the hemispherical part in which the other opening and closing part is closed There is a possibility that light leakage may be conspicuous due to the comparison with the accessory.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positions of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are determined based on the output of the light shielding sensor 915, and the light emitting portion 911 is moved when the light emitting portion 911 is operated closer to the closed state than the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). It is configured to be turned off. Thereby, since it can suppress that it will be in the state where light leaks from the clearance gap between opening-and-closing part 912a, 912b, the quality of appearance of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Moreover, even if a plurality of operation patterns of the hemispherical accessory 910 are provided by determining only the output state of the light shielding sensor 915 and setting the light emitting unit 911 to be turned on and off, the opening / closing unit 912b When the light reaches the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)), the light emitting unit 911 can be set to be turned off mechanically. That is, it is not necessary to specify the lighting timing and extinguishing timing of the light emitting unit 911 for each of a plurality of operation patterns. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity by defining lighting data and lighting extinction data for each operation pattern.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is electrically connected with a light source 231 for an accessory which is a light source of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. In addition, the contents of various tables defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from the load reference value table 222b in the first embodiment. That is, the content is changed to match the accessory of the present embodiment. Further, the RAM 223 is provided with a lighting flag 223m in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The lighting flag 223m is a flag indicating the state of the accessory light source 231 corresponding to each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. This flag consists of 1 byte, and each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 is associated with each bit. Specifically, hemispherical actors 910, 920, 930, and 940 are sequentially associated with the lower bits.

  Each bit of the lighting flag 223m indicates that the corresponding accessory is being lit if the value is 1, and indicates that the corresponding accessory is not lit if the value is 0. In addition, the value of empty bits (upper 4 bits) is fixed to 0. For example, if the lighting flag 223m is 03H (00000011B in binary notation), it means that the hemispherical accessory 910 and the hemispherical accessory 920 are being lit, and the other features are being extinguished. . Based on the state of each bit of the lighting flag 223m, it is possible to identify the hemispherical feature that is lit.

  Next, the operation start condition table 222b and the load reference value table 222c provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation start condition table 222b in the present embodiment. The operation start condition table 222b is a table in which the operation start conditions of the accessory are defined for each group in the same manner as the operation start condition table 222b in the first embodiment, and satisfies the conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b. It is possible to set the operation start of the corresponding accessory only when

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the actors in this embodiment are classified into three groups. Specifically, four hemispherical actors 910, 920, 930, and 940 are classified into group 1, a plurality of nail-like actors 1063 are classified into group 2, and a half-moon shaped actor 1060 is classified into group 3. ing. Since the group 1 does not interfere with other groups, no operation start condition is defined. Further, the group 2 is defined so that the operation can be started only when the operation of the group 3 is stopped. Further, the group 3 is defined such that the operation of the group 2 can be started only at the origin position (in a state where the group 2 is housed in the half-moon shaped accessory 1060).

  Similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, by starting the operation of the accessory in accordance with the conditions defined in the operation start condition table 222b, it is possible to vary each accessory without causing interference (contact) with each other. be able to.

  FIG. 75B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the load reference value table 222c in the present embodiment. This load reference value table 222c is a load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each accessory when each accessory is operated in the same manner as the load reference value table 222c in the first embodiment. Is a data table that defines values corresponding to (drive load reference value). Based on the load reference value table 222c, the accessory can be operated within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less by operating the accessory within the range where the total of the drive load reference values is 100 or less.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the drive load reference value when opening / closing any one of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 is 10. That is, the driving load reference value when the four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 are simultaneously opened and closed is 40. Further, the driving load reference value is 10 when any of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 is turned on. That is, if all the four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 are turned on, this corresponds to the drive load reference value 40. As a result, the driving load reference value when operating the group 1 accessory is 80 at the maximum.

  The driving load reference value for operating the claw-shaped accessory 1063 constituting the group 2 is 15, and the driving load reference value for rotating the half-moon type accessory 1060 of the group 3 is 15. That is, the driving load reference value when the upper and lower half-moon shaped objects 1060 are simultaneously rotated is 30. The drive load reference values when the half-moon shaped object 1060 is slid from the retracted position (origin position) to the extended position or slid from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position) are respectively 15. That is, the driving load reference value when the upper and lower half-moon shaped objects 1060 are simultaneously slid is 30. Therefore, the driving load reference value when operating the group 3 accessory is 60 at the maximum.

  In the present embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, based on the drive load reference value defined in the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 75 (b)), the variable item that is being changed, and the role that is newly changed. Control is performed so that the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the object is equal to or less than the current capacity (less than the rated power). As a result, the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within the range of the load current (power consumption) that is less than the current capacity (less than the rated power), so the load current (power consumption) reduces the current capacity (rated power). It can suppress exceeding. Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation abnormality of the accessory Can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the power-recovery operation table 222d provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. Similar to the power supply return operation table 222d in the first embodiment, the power supply return operation table 222d executes a return operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally varied when the power is turned on. It is a data table to be referred to when.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the power recovery operation table 222d (see FIG. 76) of this embodiment is configured such that the recovery operation is executed in the order of group 1 → group 2 → group 3 in accordance with the update of the recovery pointer 223f. Has been. Further, in the return operation of the present embodiment, as the power return operation of the four hemispherical objects constituting the group 1, the closing operation is performed until the opening / closing portion is fully opened and then completely closed. It is configured as follows. That is, the return operation is executed beyond the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)). This is because the boundary position (see FIG. 71 (c)) where the output of the light shielding sensor switches from the L state to the H state is set as the origin position as the origin position of the opening / closing section. By setting the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) as the origin position, the origin position can be accurately determined based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. Therefore, in the origin return operation that is performed before the power recovery operation is performed using the power recovery operation table 222d, the open / close portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are set to the same degree of opening. Can do. Therefore, since the power recovery operation can be executed starting from the same state, the same power recovery operation can be executed every time for all hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940. Therefore, it is sufficient to prepare only the single data table shown in FIG. 76 as the power recovery operation table 222d, and it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns according to the start position, so that the data amount can be reduced.

  Further, when the origin position is a state where the opening / closing part is completely closed, it is impossible to detect whether the opening / closing part is completely closed by the light-shielding sensor of the present embodiment. , 93, 940 may be completed before the home position is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be driven several steps after the home position is completely closed. If the home position return process is completed before it is completely closed, the operation start position of the power supply return operation varies, and the power supply return operation may not be performed accurately. In addition, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing parts may come into contact with each other and be pressed against each other, which may damage the opening / closing part and the gear. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set as the detection start position of the light shielding sensor, the start position of the power recovery operation can be made exactly the same position. Moreover, it can suppress that an opening-and-closing part and a gear are damaged by carrying out the closing operation of an opening-and-closing part excessively.

  In the present embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, by executing the power return operation of the accessory based on the power recovery operation table 222d, the entire operation range in which the accessory may operate during the normal game. Can be operated comprehensively. Thereby, when abnormality has generate | occur | produced in one of the accessories, the abnormality can be detected reliably. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the opening / closing operation of any of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940, sound, LED, and display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. In addition to notifying the abnormality by, for example, it is configured to notify that the abnormality has occurred by blinking the light emitting part of the hemispherical accessory in which the abnormality has occurred. By performing blinking operation on the accessory itself in which an abnormality has occurred, the store clerk in the hall can more easily recognize the part where the abnormality has occurred. In addition, since the light emitting part of the hemispherical accessory performs either a lighting operation or an extinguishing operation during a normal game, some abnormality occurs by executing a blinking operation that is not performed during the normal game. Can be recognized more easily. Note that the operation mode of the light emitting unit when an abnormality occurs is not limited to the blinking operation. For example, it may be configured to light up with a brighter brightness than when it is turned on during a normal game, or conversely, it may be turned on with a darker brightness. Moreover, you may comprise so that the abnormality generation | occurrence | production location may be alert | reported visually by changing continuously the brightness | luminance of the light emission part corresponding to the hemispherical object which abnormality generate | occur | produced. These also allow the hall clerk to more easily recognize the site where the abnormality has occurred.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81. First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing origin return processing 2 (S1131) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This origin return process 2 (S1131) is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 37) by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed instead of the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Process.

  Of the origin return process 2 (S1131), the process of S1206 executes the same process as the process of S1206 of the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Then, in the origin return process 2 (S1131) of the present embodiment, when the process is started, first, an opening / closing part (ie, FIG. 71) of the hemispherical accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor whose H (ON) output is being detected. The opening / closing part positioned closer to the closed state than the arrangement of (c) is set so as to open until it reaches the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)) (S1211).

  If the opening operation is performed in the H (ON) output state, the origin position cannot be detected. This is because the light shielding sensor is in the H (ON) output state even at the origin position. Therefore, in the processing of S1211, when the light shielding sensor becomes L (off) output after performing the opening operation until the light shielding sensor is in the L (off) output state (that is, until it passes through the origin position). Then, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing portion is stopped, and the accessory motor 229 is driven in the direction of the closing operation by one step. As a result, even if the origin return operation is executed from the state where the light shielding sensor is in the H (ON) output state, the opening / closing part can be returned to the origin position.

  When the processing of S1211 is completed, the hemispherical accessory opening / closing portion corresponding to the light-shielding sensor whose L (off) output is being detected (ie, located on the open state side relative to the arrangement of FIG. 71 (c)). The opening / closing part is set to be closed until it reaches the origin position (see FIG. 71C) (S1211). That is, the opening / closing part is closed until the output of the light shielding sensor first becomes H (on).

  Next, it is determined whether or not all the objects (a plurality of claw-shaped objects 1063) constituting the group 2 are at the origin position (S1213). ), It sets so as to return the combination forming the group 2 to the origin position (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1215. On the other hand, in the process of S1213, when it is determined that all the objects constituting the group 2 are at the origin position (S1213: Yes), the process of S1214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1215.

  In the process of S1215, it is determined whether or not all the objects constituting the group 3 are at the origin position (S1215). After the origin return of the accessory is completed, the group 3 is set to start the origin return (S1216), and the process proceeds to S1206. Further, if there is no combination that is deviated from the origin position in the group 3 (S1215: No), the process of S1216 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1206.

  By executing this origin return processing 2 (see FIG. 77), each accessory can be set to the origin position as in the origin return processing (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Therefore, each accessory can always be in the same arrangement at the start of the power return operation executed after the origin return processing 2 (see FIG. 77) is completed. Therefore, since the same operation should be set every time as the setting of the power recovery operation, the specified contents of the power recovery operation table 222d can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  Of these main processes (see FIG. 78), the processes of S1301 to S1310 and S1311 to S1318 execute the same processes as the processes of S1301 to S1310 and S1311 to S1318 of the main process in the first embodiment, respectively. Is done. And in the main process (refer FIG. 78) in 3rd Embodiment, when the process of S1310 is complete | finished, the lighting operation of each hemispherical accessory 910,920,930,940 and the lighting of an accessory for setting an extinction operation | movement A control process is executed (S1331). Next, a hemispherical accessory opening / closing process, which is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940, is executed (S1332), and the process proceeds to S1311.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the accessory lighting control process (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. This accessory lighting control process (S1331) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), and in order to set the lighting operation and the extinguishing operation of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 as described above. It is processing of.

  In the accessory lighting control process (S1331), first, it is determined whether or not there is an on bit in the lighting flag 223m (S3901), and when it is determined that there is no on bit (S3901: No), Since the light emitting part of the hemispherical feature is being turned off and there is no new feature for setting the turn-off, each process (S3902 to S3907) for setting the turn-off is skipped and the process proceeds to S3908. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3901 that there is an ON bit (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor corresponding to the ON bit is H (ON) (S3902). If it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S3902: No), it means that the opening / closing part is on the open state side with respect to the position to be turned off (see FIG. 71 (c)). Since it is not necessary to set the extinction, the process proceeds to S3908.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3902 that the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S3902: Yes), then the H (ON) state is set as the output of the light shielding sensor in each bit of the lighting flag 223m. A bit corresponding to the detected hemispherical object is set to 0 (S3903).

  When the processing of S3903 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on and the on-operation flag 223h is off in order to determine whether or not the origin return operation is being performed (S3904). , S3905). If it is determined that the origin return operation is being performed (S3905: Yes, S3906: Yes), the driving of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the accessory including the shading sensor that detects the H (ON) output state is included. Is stopped to stop the opening / closing unit (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3904 that the initialization flag 223g is OFF (S3904: No), the light emitting unit of the accessory corresponding to the light shielding sensor that has detected the H (ON) state in the process of S3902 The extinction is set (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908. In the process of S3905, when it is determined that the on-operation flag 223h is off (S3906: No), the origin return operation has already been completed and the power supply return operation is in progress (that is, the current light shielding sensor ON detection means that the origin position is not returned to the origin position), and the process proceeds to S3908.

  In the process of S3908, a hemispherical accessory lighting process for setting the lighting of the hemispherical accessory is executed (S3908), and this process ends. Details of the hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In this way, by executing the accessory lighting control process (see FIG. 79), each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 is placed at the stage where the opening / closing portion is at the position shown in FIG. 71 (c). Can be turned off. Here, if the light emitting unit 911 is kept on until the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed, a state immediately before closing (a slight gap is generated between the opening / closing portion 912a and the opening / closing portion 912b). In the state), since the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, the light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the appearance quality deteriorates. End up.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, four hemispherical objects are provided, but the period and the number of steps until each of the objects is closed due to individual variation or the like are not always the same. Under such circumstances, a situation may occur in which the opening / closing part is closed first only for some of the four hemispherical features. In this case, since the hemispherical object whose closing is slower than the others is in a state where light leaks from a slight gap formed before the opening and closing part is closed, the hemispherical part in which the other opening and closing part is closed There is a possibility that light leakage may be conspicuous due to the comparison with the accessory.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting the light extinction at the stage where the arrangement shown in FIG. 71C is achieved, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap between the opening / closing parts 912a and 912b. . Thereby, the appearance quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Further, by executing the accessory lighting control process (see FIG. 79), the opening / closing portion of each accessory can be stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)) in the origin return operation. The state where the opening / closing part is completely closed (see FIG. 71 (d)) is not used as the origin position, but the detection start position of the light shielding sensor is used as the origin position. This is because it can be accurately determined on the basis of this. That is, the open / close portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 can have the same degree of opening. Therefore, since the power recovery operation can be executed starting from the same state, the same power recovery operation can be executed every time for all hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns as the power recovery operation, the data amount of the power recovery operation table 222d can be reduced.

  Further, when the completely closed state is set as the origin position, it cannot be detected by the light-shielding sensor according to the present embodiment whether or not it is completely closed, so that each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 93, 940 is completely restored at the origin return. There are cases in which the return to origin is finished before it is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 is further driven several steps after it is completely closed. If the home position return process is completed before it is completely closed, the operation start position of the power supply return operation varies, and the power supply return operation may not be performed accurately. In addition, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing parts may come into contact with each other and be pressed against each other, which may damage the opening / closing part and the gear. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set as the detection start position of the light shielding sensor, the start position of the power recovery operation can be made exactly the same position. Moreover, it can suppress that an opening-and-closing part and a gear are damaged by carrying out the closing operation of an opening-and-closing part excessively.

  Next, the hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) executed in the above-described accessory lighting control process will be described with reference to FIG. This hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) is a process for setting the lighting of the hemispherical accessory.

  In the hemispherical accessory lighting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an off bit in the lighting flag 223m (S4001). If it is determined that there is no off bit (S4001: No), all hemispheres are turned on. This means that the combination items 910, 920, 930, and 940 are being lit, and there is no combination item to be newly lit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4001 that there is an off bit (S4001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor corresponding to the off bit is L (off) (S4002). When it is determined that the output of the light shielding sensor is H (on) (S4002: No), the opening / closing part of the accessory corresponding to the off bit is on the closed state side than the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c). (That is, the arrangement is in the extinguished state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4002 that the output of the light shielding sensor is L (off) (S4002: Yes), then, among the bits of the lighting flag 223m, the light shielding sensor that has detected the off state is configured. 1 is set to the bit corresponding to the hemispherical feature to be included (S4003).

  When the processing of S4003 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on and the input operation flag 223h is off in order to determine whether or not the origin return operation is being performed (S4005). S4006). If it is determined that the origin return operation is being performed (S4005: Yes, S4006: Yes), the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the hemispherical accessory including the light-shielding sensor that detects the L (off) output is included. After stopping the drive, after setting the stop of the opening / closing part, the accessory motor 229 is closed by one step (S4007), and then this process is terminated. As a result, even when the light-shielding sensor detects H (ON) when the power is turned on (the degree of opening is equal to or less than the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the return to origin operation shows the state shown in FIG. 71 (c). It can be returned to the arrangement. That is, regardless of the arrangement of the opening / closing parts when the power is turned on, the opening / closing parts of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 can be returned to the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is off in the process of S4004 (S4004: No), the light emitting unit of the accessory corresponding to the light shielding sensor that has detected the L (off) state in the process of S4002 Lighting is set (S4007), and this process is terminated. In the process of S4005, when it is determined that the on-operation flag 223h is off (S4006: No), the origin return operation has already been completed and the power supply return operation is being performed (that is, the current light-shielding sensor On-detection means that the origin position is not returned to the origin position by returning to the origin), and the process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, since the detection start position of the light shielding sensor is set to the origin position in the return to origin, the start position of the power return operation can be made exactly the same position. When the completely closed position is set as the origin position, the opening / closing part needs to be closed by further driving the accessory motor 229 for five steps after the light shielding sensor detects the H output state. is there. However, due to individual variation of the opening / closing unit, individual variation of the accessory motor 229, variation of the installation position of the light shielding sensor, the position driven by five steps is not necessarily completely closed. In addition, taking into account the individual variation of the accessory, the number of steps from when the light-shielding sensor is in the H output state to the closed state is set as one unit (in addition, one pachinko machine 10 is provided). For each of the four hemispherical actors 910, 920, 930, and 940, it is not realistic to set them individually, and the same number of steps is set for all pachinko machines 10. There is a need to. Therefore, each time he returns to the origin, the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are operated until they are completely closed (the same number of steps is set for the accessory motor 229). Some individuals have too many steps. For example, there are cases where the opening / closing part is closed at the stage of four-step operation from the origin position in the negative direction, and the upper and lower opening / closing parts are pushed into each other at the fifth step. That is, there is a possibility that the upper and lower opening / closing parts are pressed against each other when the origin is restored, and the opening / closing part is damaged. Therefore, in this embodiment, since the origin position is set to a position where the light shielding sensor is in the H output state (see FIG. 71 (c)), it is possible to suppress further pressing after the opening / closing part is completely closed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the opening / closing part from being damaged when returning to the origin.

  Next, the hemispherical accessory opening / closing process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This hemispherical accessory opening / closing process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), and is a process for setting the opening / closing of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940.

  In this hemispherical accessory opening / closing process (S1332), first, it is determined whether or not there is a light-shielding sensor in the H (on) state (S4101), and if there is no light-shielding sensor in the H (on) state ( S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4104. On the other hand, if there is a light-shielding sensor in the H (on) state (S4101), it is determined whether or not the number of detections in the on state is the fifth (S4102). That is, it is determined whether or not H (ON) is detected continuously over five main processes (see FIG. 78), and the case where H (ON) is instantaneously turned on due to the influence of noise or the like is excluded. Yes.

  In the process of S4102, when the detection of the H (ON) state is less than 5 times (S4102: No), the process proceeds to S4104. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, when the H (ON) state is detected five times in succession (S4102: YES), the hemispherical object corresponding to the shading sensor that has detected the H (ON) state is then displayed. The number of operation steps until the operation is stopped is set for the accessory motor 229 for operation (S4103). The number of steps is the number of steps from when ON is detected by the light shielding sensor until the opening / closing part is completely closed.

  In the process of S4104, it is determined whether or not there is a light-shielding sensor in the L (off) state (S4104). If there is no light-shielding sensor in the L (off) state (S4104: No), this process is terminated as it is. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a light shielding sensor in the L (off) state, it is determined whether or not the L state (off) has been detected five times in succession (S4105), and the fifth L (off) state is not detected. In this case (S4105: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the detection of the L (off) state this time is the fifth time, the opening / closing part is fully opened as the number of operation steps of the accessory motor 229 that drives the hemispherical accessory set to be lit (FIG. 71). The number of steps up to (see (a)) is set (S4106), and this process ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a hemispherical accessory capable of performing an opening / closing operation and a lighting operation in combination. Further, in order to control the lighting and extinguishing of the hemispherical accessory, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the opening / closing part is closed more than a certain amount based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. And the lighting and extinguishing are controlled based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. In other words, the light shielding sensor detects the light shielding, and the light emitting unit is turned off while the output is in the H (on) state, and the light emitting unit is turned on while the output is in the L (off) state. It is configured. That is, the light emitting unit can be turned off before the opening / closing unit is completely closed.

  If the light emitting unit 911 is kept on lighting until the opening / closing parts 912a, 912b are completely closed, in a state immediately before closing (a state where a slight gap is generated between the opening / closing part 912a and the opening / closing part 912b). In addition, since the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, the light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the appearance quality is deteriorated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positions of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are determined based on the output of the light shielding sensor 915, and the light emitting portion 911 is moved when the light emitting portion 911 is operated closer to the closed state than the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). It is configured to be turned off. Thereby, since it can suppress that it will be in the state where light leaks from the clearance gap between opening-and-closing part 912a, 912b, the quality of appearance of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor (position where the output state is switched from the L output state to the H output state) is set to the origin position of the opening / closing part of the hemispherical accessory. This is because the origin position can be accurately determined based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. That is, the open / close portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 can have the same degree of opening. Therefore, since the power recovery operation can be executed starting from the same state, the same power recovery operation can be executed every time for all hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns as the power recovery operation, the data amount can be reduced.

  Further, when the completely closed state is set as the origin position, it cannot be detected by the light-shielding sensor of this embodiment whether or not it is completely closed. There are cases in which the return to origin is finished before it is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 is further driven several steps after being completely closed. If the home position return process is completed before it is completely closed, the operation start position of the power supply return operation varies, and the power supply return operation may not be performed accurately. In addition, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing parts may come into contact with each other and be pressed against each other, which may damage the opening / closing part and the gear. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set as the detection start position of the light shielding sensor, the start position of the power recovery operation can be made exactly the same position. Moreover, it can suppress that an opening-and-closing part and a gear are damaged by carrying out the closing operation of an opening-and-closing part excessively.

  In this embodiment, when each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 93, 940 is opened to a certain level or higher from the closed state (see FIG. 71 (c)), the corresponding accessory is turned on, In the case of closing from the opened state to a certain level or higher (see FIG. 71 (c)), the corresponding accessory is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an accessory is lit, it may be configured to be lit at the same time as the opening of the accessory starts. In addition, the light emitting unit is not configured to be turned on or off, but may be configured to be lit even in a closed state and set to a darker brightness than that in an open state. .

  In the present embodiment, the state of the light emitting unit is switched based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor, but the switching is not limited to the brightness of the light emitting unit. For example, instead of the light emitting unit, a display unit capable of displaying display information such as an image is mounted on the hemispherical accessory, and the image displayed on the display unit is switched based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. Also good. In this case, a transparent or translucent member may be employed as the opening / closing portion so that the player can visually recognize the image displayed on the display means while the opening / closing portion is closed. . Further, as a specific example of the image displayed on the display means, for example, when the shading sensor is in the H (ON) output state (that is, the opening / closing part is completely closed or slightly opened) The image of the person is displayed and the image of the person is displayed while the light-shielding sensor is in the L (off) output state (that is, the state where the opening / closing part is opened from the position of FIG. 71 (c)). Good. Moreover, you may comprise so that a different image can be selected as the image of the person to be displayed and the image of the person to be displayed according to the aspect of the effect and the result of the effect (whether or not it is a big hit). Thereby, while the figure is displayed, it is possible to make the player play the game with interest in which person is displayed. Further, when the light shielding sensor outputs L (off) and an image of a person is displayed, it is possible to predict the content and result of the effect depending on the type of the person. Therefore, since the freedom degree of the production | presentation using hemispherical objects can be raised more, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing part having a structure in which the upper and lower members operate symmetrically is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a bowl-shaped opening / closing part that opens and closes the left and right members, a door-type opening / closing part that opens / closes in front or near, a shutter-type opening / closing part that opens / closes from one direction may be adopted.

  In the present embodiment, the origin return operation is configured to always return to a specific position (position shown in FIG. 71 (c)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the output of the light shielding sensor is L (off), the closing operation is performed so as to return to the specific position, and when the output of the light shielding sensor is H (on), the opening / closing unit is stopped without being operated. It may be left as it is. During normal games, the open / close portions of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are completely closed for most of the period, and thus the opening operation is performed from the closed state to the specific position when the power is turned on. The possibility increases. That is, the period required for the return to origin tends to be long. On the other hand, when the origin return is not performed when the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the H (on) state, the time required for the origin return can be shortened. In the power recovery operation performed thereafter, first, the open / close portions of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 may be opened until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L (off). . Then, the opening operation and the closing operation may be executed starting from the position where the output of the light shielding sensor is in the L (off) state. Thereby, the operation after the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L (off) can be made common.

  In the present embodiment, the output of the light shielding sensor is in the H state from the state in which the open / close portions of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 are closed to the origin position shown in FIG. 71 (c). The position of the light shielding sensor is set as described above, but is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the opening / closing part is opened and in the closed state, the light-shielding sensor is in the L output state, and the transition from the closed state to the open state is in progress (the transition from the open state to the closed state). The shading sensor may be configured to be in the H output state at the position. Further, the origin position may be an edge on the open state side or an edge on the closed state side among the detection positions of the light shielding sensor. Further, for example, when the edge on the open state side is set to the origin position, as a return to origin, if the light shielding sensor is in the H state when the power is turned on, the accessory motor 229 is opened until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L. It only has to be operated to the side. When the output of the light shielding sensor detects L, it is only necessary to return by one step in the direction of the closed state (negative direction). On the other hand, if the output of the light-shielding sensor is L when the power is turned on, it cannot be determined whether the origin position is in the open state side or the closed state side. For example, first, in the open state side (positive direction) If the sensor output does not change, it is operated in two steps on the closed state side (negative direction). If the output of the sensor does not change, thereafter, the steps are incremented by 1 until the light-shielding sensor detects the H output state, and the positive and negative directions are operated alternately. As a result, the origin position can be found while increasing the amplitude one step at a time in the positive direction and in the negative direction, so that if the position is moved in the direction opposite to the origin position, it will be excessively opened or closed. Can be suppressed. Further, when the light shielding sensor detects H when operated in the forward direction, it means that the edge opposite to the origin position has been reached. Therefore, the accessory motor 229 is opened until the light shielding sensor output becomes L. It only has to be operated to the side. When the output of the light shielding sensor detects L, it is only necessary to return by one step in the direction of the closed state (negative direction). Conversely, if the output of the sensor switches to H while operating in the negative direction during return to origin, it means that the position is the origin position, so return to origin when the shading sensor detects H. Can be terminated. In this way, even when the light-shielding sensor is in the intermediate position between the closed state and the open state, the open / close unit is returned to the origin position without excessively opening or closing the open / close unit. be able to. Therefore, it can suppress that an opening-and-closing part will be damaged by excessive operation | movement.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 87. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, one or a plurality of actors that do not interfere with each other are grouped, and operating conditions are set in units of groups. In other words, in the case where the actors constituting one group are varied, the operation is performed only when the condition that does not interfere with other groups is established based on the operation condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b. The start was configured to be settable. In addition, each group is composed of an accessory that operates at the same time at the operation timing such as when the production starts (executes the same system of operation production).

  On the other hand, in this modified example, the actors that may not interfere with all the other actors are grouped together (group 1), and the actors that may interfere with each other by being varied are grouped together. Are grouped (group 2). And the operation condition with respect to each accessory which comprises the group 2 is prescribed | regulated, and it is comprised so that an accessory may be operated according to an operation condition. Thereby, the actors constituting the group 1 can be varied without restriction (freely) except for the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, the freedom degree of operation | movement of the accessory which comprises the group 1 can be raised. Moreover, it can suppress that malfunctions, such as damage of an accessory by the interference of an accessory, generate | occur | produce.

  The modification of the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in configuration in that, in the sound lamp control device 113, an operation start condition table 222b defined in the ROM 222 and a load reference value table The point that the contents of 222c are changed, the point that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is provided in the RAM 223, and the partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 39) are the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. It is a difference. Other configurations, various processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are described in the first embodiment. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG.

<Electrical Configuration of Modification of First Embodiment>
First, referring to FIGS. 82 to 84, an operation start condition table 222b, a load reference value table 222c, a power return operation table 222d, which are provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the first embodiment, The accessory operation setting table 222e will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the load reference value table 222c is described first, and then the operation start condition table 222b and the accessory operation setting table 222e are described.

  Similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the load reference value table 222c is a data table that defines a driving load reference value for each accessory when each accessory is varied. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the drive load reference value when each accessory is varied is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the present modification, two types of groups, group 1 and group 2, are provided, and the accessory constituting each group is the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. It has been changed from. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the group 1 includes the slide actors 810, 820, 830, and 840, the rotating accessory 520, the left-hand swinging hand 710, and the right-hand swinging hand. 730, and a central swinging accessory 720. The central swinging accessory 720 is configured such that only the swinging motion belongs to the group 1 and the descending motion belongs to the group 2. All of the combinations constituting the group 1 are combinations that have no possibility of interfering with other combinations regardless of the arrangement of the other combinations. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an interference condition for the actors constituting the group 1, and can be operated freely in principle.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the actors constituting the group 2 are the tilting agent 510, the standing agent 410, and the central swinging agent 720. As described above, all of these items are moved to the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 by changing them, so that one of the items constituting the group 2 is operating or is in the extended position. In this case, when other actors constituting the group 2 are operated, these actors may come into contact (collision). Therefore, in this embodiment, an operation start condition is provided for the group 2. The operation start condition for this group 2 is defined in the operation start condition table 222b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82A, the operation start condition table 222b in the present modification will be described. Similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the operation start condition table 222b is a data table that defines the operation start conditions for starting the operation of each accessory. In the operation start condition table 222b of the present embodiment, only the operation start conditions of each of the actors constituting the group 2 (the tilting accessory 510, the standing accessory 410, and the central swinging accessory 720) are defined. Not specified for Group 1. As described above, it is not necessary to set the operation start condition because there is no possibility that the objects constituting the group 1 interfere with other objects even if operated.

  The operation start condition table 222b stipulates that the standing combination 410 and the central swing combination 720 are at the origin position as a condition that allows the tilting combination 510 to start operating. In addition, as a condition that allows the standing member 410 to start operating, it is defined that the tilting member 510 and the central swinging member 720 are at the origin position. Further, as a condition that allows the lowering action of the central swinging accessory 720 to be started, it is defined that the tilting accessory 510 and the standing accessory 410 are at the origin position. By operating each accessory constituting the group 2 in accordance with these conditions, it is possible to suppress each of the actors constituting the group 2 from interfering with each other. Therefore, the action is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 because the action is damaged by the interference of the actions, or the action of the action is obstructed by another action. It can be suppressed that the content of the display effect is shifted and the player feels uncomfortable.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the group is not set, and the order of operations, the operation prohibition conditions, etc. are set finely for each accessory. However, in recent years, since the number and types of bonuses mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, setting various conditions for all bonuses increases the work load on the designer and increases the operating conditions. There has been a problem that the data capacity of the data table for prescribing is also increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the group 1 composed of only the parts that do not interfere with the other parts is included in the group 1 provided in the pachinko machine 10, and The grouping is performed with the group 2 composed of the features that may interfere with the other features. Then, only the condition for the accessory belonging to the group 2 is defined as the operation start condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b. As a result, the data amount of the operation start condition table 222b can be reduced, so that a storage device with a small capacity can be employed as the ROM 222. Therefore, since an inexpensive storage device can be introduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In this modified example, when one actor constituting the group 2 is operated as an operation condition of the group 2, the operation can be started only when no other actor in the group 2 is operating. However, it is not limited to this. For example, there is a possibility of interfering with another accessory only during the operation (that is, there is no possibility of interfering with the other accessory of the group 2 at the origin position and the extended position) (the accessory A). May be added to the configuration, or a feature (combination B) that may interfere only with a specific feature of group 2 (for example, the standing feature 410) may be added to the configuration. In the case of such a configuration, for example, in addition to the condition that the tilting role 510 and the central swinging role 720 are at the origin position, the operating condition of the standing role 410 is “the role of the role A is the origin position or tension. What is necessary is just to add the conditions "it is in an outgoing position" and the condition that the accessory B is not operating. As described above, even if the number of objects to be operated is increased, the operation of the objects can be suitably set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the power recovery operation table 222d in the present modification will be described. FIG. 83A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the power recovery operation table 222d in the present modification. Similar to the first embodiment, the power recovery operation table 222d is a table that is referred to when a power recovery operation is executed.

  In this modification, the operation is roughly divided into three steps (operation scenario 1 to operation scenario 3). In the power recovery operation table 222d, the type of the accessory to be operated is defined for each stage (operation scenario). Specifically, in the operation scenario 1, the power recovery operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, and 840, the power recovery operation of the rotating agent 520, and the power recovery operation of the tilting agent 510 are performed simultaneously. It is specified that it will be executed. That is, it is defined that a plurality of accessories belonging to group 1 and one accessory belonging to group 2 are operated simultaneously. As described above, since the combination belonging to the group 1 can be operated without interfering with other combinations, a plurality of combinations can be operated simultaneously. On the other hand, since there is a possibility that an accessory belonging to group 2 may interfere with other actors belonging to group 2, it is specified that only one accessory is operated at a time so that interference does not occur. Yes. Note that in the operation scenario 1, not all the members in the group 1 are moved at the same time, but only the slide members 810, 820, 830, and 840 and the rotation member 520 among the members in the group 1 are operated. The reason for this is to prevent the total load current (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), as the contents of the power recovery operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is located at the overhang position from the origin position. After the operation up to (see FIG. 10), the operation of returning to the origin position is executed (see FIG. 83 (b)). In addition, as the power recovery operation of the rotating agent 520, an operation is performed in which the rotating agent 520 is rotated once in the clockwise direction to return to the origin position, and then is rotated counterclockwise once and stopped at the origin position. (See FIG. 83 (b)). Further, as the power return operation of the tilting agent 510, the tilting agent 510 is operated from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 9), and then returned to the origin position and stopped (FIG. 83 (FIG. 83)). b)).

  In the operation scenario 2 executed after the power recovery operation of the tilting combination 510 is completed, the power recovery operation of each slide combination 810, 820, 830, 840 is executed following the operation scenario 1. This is because the power recovery operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is configured to take a longer time compared to other accessories. Further, when the operation of the tilting accessory 510 belonging to the group 2 is completed, a new accessory belonging to the group 2 can be operated, so that the power recovery operation of the standing agent 410 belonging to the group 2 is performed in parallel. It is specified that it is executed. In the operation scenario 1, when the power recovery operation of the rotating combination 520 in the group 1 is not completed, the operation may be performed across the operation scenario 2. This is because the rotating combination 520 belonging to the group 1 does not interfere with other combinations, and therefore does not affect the other combinations even if the operation scenario 2 is reached.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), as the power return operation of the standing object 410, the standing object 410 is moved from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 8) and then returned to the origin position. The operation of stopping is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)).

  Furthermore, in the operation scenario 3 that is executed after the power recovery operation of the standing member 410 is completed, the power recovery operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, and 840 is executed following the operation scenario 2. This is because, as described above, the power recovery operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is configured to take a longer time compared to other accessories. In addition, the power-returning operation of the left-side swinging combination 710 and the right-side swinging combination 730 belonging to the group 1 is started. Further, when the operation of the standing combination 410 belonging to the group 2 is completed, a new combination belonging to the group 2 can be operated, and thus the power return operation of the central swinging combination 720 is started.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the power return operation of the left swinging member 710 and the right swinging member 730 is as follows. The operation of stopping is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)). As the power return operation of the central swinging accessory 720, the central swinging accessory 720 is operated from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 13) and then returned to the origin position and stopped. (See FIG. 83 (b)).

  Although not shown in the figure, the END data is read out when the operation scenario is updated after the control based on the operation scenario 3 is completed. By defining the END data, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is the end timing of the power recovery operation.

  As described above, in the power recovery operation table 222d of the present modification, when performing the power recovery operation, the power recovery operation is sequentially performed on the actors of group 2 that cannot be operated simultaneously. It is prescribed as follows. Further, the group 1 bonus that does not interfere with other bonuses is configured to operate while the power recovery operation of any bonus of the group 2 is being performed. As a result, since the power recovery operation can be executed in parallel for a plurality of accessories, the time required until the power recovery operation is completed can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the accessory operation setting table 222e in the present modification will be described. Similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the accessory operation setting table 222e is a data table in which the operation timing of the accessory and the accessory to be operated are defined for each type of effect. As described above, in this modification, one or a plurality of actors that are operated simultaneously are not configured as a group, but groups are distinguished according to whether or not they interfere with other actors. Therefore, in the accessory operation setting table 222e in this modification, the accessory itself for starting the operation is defined for each group.

  Specifically, in the opening effect, the slide objects 810, 820, 830, and 840 belonging to the group 1 are defined as the objects that start the operation when the effect starts. On the other hand, it does not stipulate an accessory belonging to group 2. In addition, in the detachment super reach and the shared super reach, the swinging combinations 710, 720, and 730 belonging to the group 1 are defined as the combinations that start the operation when 8 seconds have elapsed. On the other hand, it does not stipulate an accessory belonging to group 2. In addition, a rotating combination 520 belonging to the group 1 and a tilting combination 510 belonging to the group 2 are defined as the combination for starting the operation when 15 seconds have elapsed.

  In the detachment special reach A and the shared special reach A, the standing upright 410 belonging to the group 2 is defined as an accessory that starts an operation when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the production. On the other hand, it does not stipulate an accessory belonging to Group 1. In addition, a rotating combination 520 belonging to the group 1 and a tilting combination 510 belonging to the group 2 are defined as the combination for starting the operation when 15 seconds have elapsed. In addition, as a combination for starting the operation when 25 seconds have elapsed, each slide combination 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to group 1 and a standing combination 410 belonging to group 2 are defined.

  In the detachment special reach B and the shared special reach B, as a combination for starting the operation when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the production, each slide combination 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to the group 1, and the rotation combination 520, A tilting role 510 belonging to group 2 is defined. Further, a standing object 410 belonging to group 2 is defined as an accessory that starts operation when 15 seconds have elapsed. On the other hand, it does not stipulate an accessory belonging to Group 1. In addition, as a combination for starting the operation when 25 seconds have elapsed, each slide combination 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to group 1 and a standing combination 410 belonging to group 2 are defined.

  In the special reach, as the actors that start the operation when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the production, each of the slide actors 810, 820, 830, and 840 belonging to the group 1 and the rotating accessory 520 and the tilting agent 510 belonging to the group 2 are included. Is prescribed. Further, a standing object 410 belonging to group 2 is defined as an accessory that starts operation when 15 seconds have elapsed. In addition, as a combination for starting the operation when 25 seconds have elapsed, the sliding combination 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to the group 1 and the lowering operation of the central swinging combination 720 belonging to the group 2 are defined.

  As described above, in the accessory operation setting table 222e according to the present embodiment, the accessory to be started at each production start timing is defined by distinguishing the accessory belonging to the group 1 and the accessory belonging to the group 2. Yes. As a result, instead of discriminating between the accessory specified in the action start condition table 222b and the accessory to be started, only those specified as the belongings belonging to the group 2 in the accessory action setting table 222e are obtained. What is necessary is just to make it a judgment object. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced in the process for determining the operation start condition.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the accessory control process 3 (S1341) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present modification. This accessory control process 3 (S1341) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed instead of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Process.

  Of the accessory control process 3 (S1341), the processes of S1401 and S1403 to S1405 are the same as the processes of S1401 and S1403 to S1405 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. In the accessory control process 3 (S1341) of the present embodiment, when the process of S1405 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S1403 that there is no accessory that should be set to stop operation (S1403). : No), an operation start setting process, which is a process for setting the operation start of an accessory, is executed (S1431), and this process ends. Details of the operation start setting process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is on (S1401: Yes), then the initial operation process 3 is executed (S1432), and this process ends. Details of the initial operation processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the initial operation process 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process 3. This initial operation process 3 is a process for setting the power supply return operation of the accessory, etc., similarly to the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment.

  Of the initial operation process 3 (S1432), the processes of S1501 to S1509 and S1512 to S1514 are the processes of S1501 to S1509 and S1512 to S1514 of the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing is executed. In the initial operation process 3 (S1432) of this modification, if it is determined that the operation stop period has ended in the process of S1509 (S1509: Yes), then, whether or not the operation scenario execution flag 223n is on. (S1531) and if it is on (S1531), it means that one of the operation scenarios (see FIG. 83 (a)) is being executed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1532). If it is determined that the power recovery operation is being performed based on the operation scenario (see FIG. 83 (a)) in which the group 2 accessory is set (S1532: No), the power recovery operation continues in the current operation scenario. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1532 that the power recovery operation of the group 2 accessory has ended (S1532: Yes), the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to OFF (S1533), and this process ends. . By setting the operation scenario execution flag 223n to OFF, a new scenario can be started in the next initial operation setting process 3.

  In the process of S1531, when it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is off (S1531: No), the operation scenario is updated (S1534), and the updated operation scenario is read (S1535). For example, if the completed operation scenario is operation scenario 1, operation scenario 2 is newly read.

  In the initial operation process 3 of this modification, when the process of S1512 ends, the operation scenario execution flag 223n is then set to ON (S1536), and this process ends. By turning on the operation scenario execution flag 223n, it is possible to execute the power recovery operation of the accessory according to the currently selected operation scenario.

  As described above, by executing the initial operation process 3 (see FIG. 86), the power recovery operation of the group 1 accessory is executed in parallel with the power recovery operation of the group 2 accessory in order. be able to. Therefore, the power recovery operation can be executed efficiently.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the operation start setting process (S1431). In this operation start setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory for which operation start is to be set (S4201), and when it is determined that there is no accessory to be started (S4201: No), This process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that there is a bonus to be set to start the operation (S4201: Yes), then there is a bonus belonging to the group 2 in the bonus to be set to start the operation. It is determined whether or not (S4202). That is, it is determined whether or not the data of the group 2 accessory is not blank (Null data) in the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 84). If there is an accessory belonging to group 2 (that is, the data of the accessory of group 2 is not Null data) (S4202), the operation start condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b is read (S4203). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation start condition is satisfied (S4204).

  If it is determined as a result of the determination in S4204 that the operation start condition is satisfied (S4204: Yes), the process proceeds to S4207. Also, in the process of S4202, in the case where it is determined that there is no accessory belonging to group 2 among the actors whose operation is to be started (that is, the accessory belonging to group 1) (S4202: No), S4203. The process of S4206 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4207. When all of the actors whose operation start is to be set belong to group 1, the processing of steps S4203 to S4206 is skipped even if the actor belonging to group 1 is operated, it interferes with other actors. This is because there is no possibility and it is not necessary to read the operation start condition from the operation start condition table 222b to determine whether the operation can be started. In this way, by performing grouping from the viewpoint of whether or not there is a possibility of interference with another accessory, the processing for determining the operation start condition for the accessory in group 1 can be omitted. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  If it is determined in the process of S4204 that the operation start condition is not satisfied (S4204: No), the operation start of the group 2 accessory that does not satisfy the operation start condition is canceled (S4205), and the canceled accessory is The corresponding display substitute effect command is set (S4206), and the process proceeds to S4207. As described above, since the operation start condition is not set for the group 1 accessory, the operation start is not canceled in the process of S4205. In other words, in order to prevent interference with other accessories, it is possible to cancel only the operation of the minimum accessory.

  In the process of S4202, when it is determined that there is no accessory belonging to group 2 among the actors to be started to operate (S4202: No), the actors to be started to operate include the group 2 accessory. In the process of S4207 that is executed after the process of S4206 is completed when the combination belonging to the group 2 satisfies the operation start condition (S4204: Yes) or the process of S4206 is completed, it is stored in the load value storage area 223e. A value obtained by adding the driving load total value and the driving load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which it is determined that the operation start is to be set is stored in the determination value storage area 223j (S4207).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is greater than 100 (S4208). If it is determined that the stored value is 100 or less (S4208: No), even if the accessory determined to start operation in the process of S4201 is operated, it is supplied to the accessory motor 229. This means that the total value of the load currents is within the range of the current capacity or less, so that the operation start of the accessory is set, and among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i, the operation start is set. 1 is set to the bit corresponding to (S4209). Then, the value stored in the discriminant value storage area 223j (the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory that has been determined to be set to start operation) are added. Is stored in the load value storage area 223e to update the drive load total value (S4210), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4208, when it is determined that the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S4208: Yes), the start of the action of the accessory is canceled (S4211), and the alternative effect is displayed. For this purpose, a display substitute effect command is set (S4212), and the process is terminated. If a display substitute effect command is set in the process of S4206, the display substitute effect command in this process is overwritten. The display substitute effect command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display substitute effect command, the display control device 114 starts the substitute effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26B) corresponding to the accessory whose operation stop has been canceled in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even if the operation of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to execute a display effect that makes it feel as if the accessory has operated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the production has the same level of expectation as when the actor moves, so that the player can play the game while having an appropriate degree of expectation for each production. Can be done.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment, there is a case where an accessory that has no possibility of interfering with another accessory is defined as a group 1 and interferes with each other by being varied. The role is defined as Group 2. And an operating condition is prescribed | regulated with respect to each accessory which comprises the group 2, and it comprises so that the accessory which belongs to the group 2 may be operated according to an operating condition. Thereby, the actors constituting the group 1 can be varied without restriction (freely) except for the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, the freedom degree of operation | movement of the accessory which comprises the group 1 can be raised. Moreover, it can suppress that malfunctions, such as damage of an accessory by the interference of an accessory, generate | occur | produce. Furthermore, since the operation start condition is set only for the actors in group 2 instead of setting the operation order and interference conditions for all the accessories, the operation conditions can be simplified. . Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In this modification, there are provided a group 1 composed of a combination that does not interfere with each other and a group 2 composed of a combination that may interfere with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, you may provide multiple groups comprised with the accessory which does not mutually interfere. In this case, it is possible to configure such that the actors that are operated simultaneously (for example, the respective slide actors 810, 820, 830, and 840) are set as one group, and a predetermined operation is performed according to the group. . Thereby, when operating an accessory, it is only necessary to set an operation for each group instead of setting an operation for each accessory, so that the processing load can be reduced. Moreover, although it does not interfere with the other group's accessory, you may provide two or more groups comprised with the accessory which interferes with the accessory in the same group. Thereby, even if the type of the accessory increases and the interference condition becomes complicated, the operation condition of each accessory can be simplified. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the present modification, the pachinko machine 10 that interferes with each other when one of the actors constituting the group 2 is in the overhang position and the other actors belonging to the group 2 are variable has been described. It is not something that can be done. If the other actors are operated during the variable of one of the actors constituting the group 2, there is a possibility that they interfere with each other, but the one actor stops at the origin position or overhang position. In such a case, it is possible to include an accessory that does not cause interference. For example, when a set of rod-like objects that are in parallel with each other when they are at the origin position and the overhang position are varied in an arc shape so as to approach each other starting from one end Is mentioned. That is, it is possible to move from the origin position to the overhanging position by changing it 180 degrees starting from one end of the accessory, or conversely, it is possible to move to the origin position by changing 180 degrees from the overhanging position. An example is an accessory. In this case, the operation condition of group 2 can be started only when another accessory is at the origin position or the overhang position (that is, the other accessory of group 2 is not variable). ).

  In this modification, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), and whether or not the operation start of the accessory is cancelled. However, it is not always necessary. For example, in the case of a model in which the load current (power consumption) is less than the current capacity (rated power) even if all the types of actors that can be changed at the same time are operated, or the current capacity (rated power) When a sufficiently large power supply device 115 is employed, the determination of the load current (power consumption) can be omitted. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the load reference value table 222c of the ROM 222, the load value storage area 223e and the discriminant value storage area 223j of the RAM 223 can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

<About the 2nd modification in 1st Embodiment>
Next, a second modification example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. In the first embodiment described above, when setting the action of an accessory, if it is determined that the total value of the load reference values exceeds 100, the action of all the accessories for which a new action is to be set is canceled. It was configured as follows. On the other hand, in the second modified example, the priority order of operation stop is set for each accessory, and the operation is stopped from the accessory with a higher priority. Thereby, even when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, more objects can be operated.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in configuration in that the priority table 222f that defines the priority order of the functions in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is It is provided and a part of processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are described in the first embodiment. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG.

<Electrical Configuration of Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, the priority table 222f added to the ROM 222 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the priority order table 222f is a table that defines the priority order when the operation stop is set. In the priority table 222f, the smaller the priority number, the higher the priority for stopping the operation.

  89 (a) and 89 (b) are diagrams showing examples of the priority order table 222f. In this priority order table 222f, a priority order for setting an operation stop is defined for each type of accessory.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the priority order table 222f when the priority order is higher for an accessory having a larger driving load reference value. As shown in the figure, the tilting role 510 having the largest drive load reference value has the highest priority. In addition, there are a plurality of accessories having the second highest drive load reference value (that is, an accessory having a drive load reference value of 15), but the one that performs the rendering operation alone has a higher priority. Yes. Thereby, it can suppress that only a part of each slide accessory 810,820,830,840 which operate | moves simultaneously stops operation | movement. Similarly, with respect to the rotating combination 520, the left swinging combination 710, and the right swinging combination 730 having the lowest drive load reference value, the priority order of the respective swinging combinations 710 and 730 that are simultaneously operated in the production is lowered. Thus, each swinging accessory 710, 730 is configured to operate together as much as possible.

  By determining the accessory whose operation is to be stopped based on this priority table 222f, when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), more actors are started to operate. be able to.

  FIG. 89 (b) is another example of the priority table 222f. The example of FIG. 89 (b) is an example in which the operation stop is set with a combination (for example, each slide combination 810, 820, 830, 840) to be operated in combination in various effects as a unit. . In other words, the priority order for setting the operation stop is set higher in order from the highest load reference value for each unit to be operated simultaneously. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that only a part of the accessory that normally operates in combination operates to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the production.

  In the example of FIG. 89 (b), each slide combination 810, 820, 830, 840 has the highest priority, and then the combination combination of the tilting combination 510 and the rotation combination 520 has the highest priority. . Further, each swinging role 710, 730 is defined as a unit having the third highest priority, followed by the standing role 410, and the central swinging as the lowest priority. A moving object 720 is defined.

  In this way, by preferentially stopping the action of a combination that operates in combination, only a part of the combination that normally operates in combination will operate, and the player will feel uncomfortable with the contents of the performance. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the prioritization method is not limited to this. For example, the priority may be set according to the distance from the third symbol display device 81 that the player will pay attention to during the normal game. That is, the farther away from the 3rd symbol display device 81, the harder the player is aware of the presence or absence of the action of the accessory. Good. Thereby, even when the operation of the accessory is canceled, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the operation has been canceled.

  Further, for example, it may be configured such that the priority for stopping the operation becomes higher for an accessory that operates alone. For example, if a combination in which a plurality of actors operate in a complex manner, such as the slide actors 810, 820, 830, and 840, is stopped, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the operation has been stopped. There is a fear. Therefore, by stopping an accessory that operates independently, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the operation has been canceled.

  Further, for example, for an accessory that gives some notification to the player depending on the operation content, the priority order for canceling the operation may be lowered. For example, a roulette-like accessory is included in the configuration, and when notifying whether or not it is a big hit by the position where the roulette needle has stopped, if the operation is canceled during the operation of the roulette-like accessory, There is a risk that the needle of the roulette-like accessory will be stopped at a position different from the original special symbol lottery result. That is, there is a possibility that the player will misunderstand the lottery result of the special symbol. On the other hand, it is possible to cause the player to accurately recognize the notification content of the accessory by making it difficult to cancel the action of the accessory that makes some notification to the player.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device of Second Modification in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the second modification example in the first embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 90, the accessory control process 4 (S1351) performed by MPU221 of the 2nd modification is demonstrated. This accessory control process 4 (S1351) is replaced with the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It is a process to be executed.

  Of the accessory control process 4 (S1351), the processes of S1401 to S1406 and S1408 to S1411 are respectively S1401 to S1406 and S1408 to S1411 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the accessory control process 4 (S1351) of the present embodiment, the value stored in the discriminant value storage area 223j in the process of S1409 (the driving load reference value corresponding to the active accessory and the start of the operation is newly started). When it is determined that the total of the drive load reference values to be set) is greater than 100 (S1441), an adjustment control process that is a process for stopping the operation of the accessory according to the priority order is executed (S1441), This process ends. By executing this adjustment control process (S1441), it is possible to operate more objects while keeping the load current (power consumption) within the current capacity range.

  Next, details of the adjustment control process (S1441) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the adjustment control process (S1441) for setting the operation stop of the accessory according to the priority order. In this adjustment control process (S1441), first, priority data of an operation is read from the priority table 222f (S4301). Next, among the items for which operation data is set, the operation data of the item having the highest priority for operation stop is set to be released (S4302), and the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (in operation) The driving load reference value corresponding to the accessory whose release has been set by the processing of S4302 is subtracted from the driving load reference value corresponding to the accessory of the current item and the total of the driving load reference values to be newly set to start operation. (S4303). Next, a display effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 in place of the accessory whose operation has been canceled by setting an alternative display command for display corresponding to the accessory whose operation data has been canceled. (S4304). Thereby, even if the operation of the accessory is cancelled, it is possible to display an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  When the process of S4304 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the total value of the drive load reference values after the subtraction in the process of S4303 exceeds 100 (S4305). The processing shifts to S4302, and each processing of S4302 to S4305 is repeated until the total of the drive load reference values becomes 100 or less.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4305 that the total of the drive load reference values is 100 or less (S4305: No), the action of the accessory is set by setting the drive data of the accessory for which the action data is set. The start is set (S4306), and among the bits of the accessory action flag 223i, 1 is set to the bit corresponding to the accessory for which the action start is set (S4307). Then, based on each bit of the accessory action flag 223i updated in the process of S4307 and the load reference value table 222c, the total driving load value in the load value storage area e is updated (S4308), and this process is terminated. To do.

  By executing this adjustment control process (S1441), it is possible to operate more objects while keeping the load current (power consumption) within the current capacity range.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second modified example is configured such that the priority of operation stop is set for each accessory, and the operation is stopped from the accessory with a higher priority. Thereby, even when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, more objects can be operated.

<Modification of the Second Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced, so that more load current (power consumption) can be used for the operation of the accessory motor 229. It was.

  As this development type, in this modification, various examples will be described in which a period in which the load current (power consumption) is low in one configuration and a period in which the load current (power consumption) is high in another configuration. That is, various examples for preventing the load current (power consumption) from rising excessively in the pachinko machine 10 as a whole will be described. Examples of the period during which the load current (power consumption) is high include a period during which the LED current of an LED such as the LCD backlight 230 is turned on and a period during which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229. . Further, examples of the period during which the load current (power consumption) is high include a period in which the LED current of the LED such as the LCD backlight 230 is turned on, a period in which excitation is not set for the accessory motor 229, and the like. It is done.

  First, an example in which the period in which the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is turned off coincides with the period in which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a change in the LED current value of the LCD backlight 230 and a timing at which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229. As shown in the figure, in this modification, periods a to g are associated with periods when the LCD backlight 230 is off. In this modification, excitation is set for the accessory motor 229 during these periods a to g. More specifically, for example, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is periodically turned on and off in an on period of 80% and an off period of 20%. Is set as follows.

  Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the return to the origin of the accessory and the power return operation are performed. In these return-to-origin and power supply return operations, it is necessary to set the operation for a plurality of accessories, so that the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 tends to increase. For this reason, in this modification, it is set as the structure which sets operation | movement of 1 step of the accessory motor 229 whenever it becomes the period (each period of ag) from which LED of the LCD backlight 230 turns off. As a result, the load current (power consumption) is prevented from increasing instantaneously, and the sum of the load current (power) supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 can be calculated as an average value or an instantaneous value. It can be kept within the range of capacity (rated power).

  In this modification, the off-period of the LCD backlight 230 is set to an audio lamp so that the timing for setting the excitation for the accessory motor 229 does not deviate from the off-period of the LCD backlight 230. The MPU 221 of the control device 113 is configured to be grasped. Specifically, the LED driver that controls the LCD backlight 230 uses the reference signal (synchronization signal) used to periodically set the on period and the off period of the LED to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Output. Based on this reference signal, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the present time is the on period or the off period of the LCD backlight 230, and sets the excitation in the off period. It is configured.

  In the above modification, the LED driver is configured to output a reference signal to the MPU 221, but conversely, a means for generating a reference signal (synchronization signal) is provided in the sound lamp control device 113, and the LED You may comprise so that a reference signal may be output with respect to a driver.

  Next, an example in which the LCD backlight 230 is independently controlled in association with a plurality of regions of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, the area about 3/4 on the upper side of the screen is area a, and the area about 1/4 on the lower side of the screen is area b, and the lighting timing of the LEDs constituting the LCD backlight 230 is set for each area. It is configured to be variable. That is, different control commands are set for the LED driver in the region a and the region b.

  As a configuration for making the lighting timing variable in the area a and the area b, for example, LED bars are provided on the upper and lower sides of the screen, and the upper and lower LED bars are respectively set to different channels of the LED driver. By connecting them, the upper and lower LED bars may be controlled independently. In this case, a light guide plate for uniformly irradiating the light of the LED bar to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel may have a shape that covers each of the region a and the region b. That is, a light guide plate (light guide plate A) having substantially the same shape as the region a is provided on the back surface of the portion corresponding to the region a in the liquid crystal panel, and a light guide plate (light guide plate B) having substantially the same shape as the region b is provided on the liquid crystal panel. It is provided on the back surface of the portion corresponding to the region b. Thereby, since the light from the LED bar provided in the upper side of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 injects into the light guide plate A, the incident light can be uniformly irradiated with respect to the area | region a. . Moreover, since the light from the LED bar provided on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81 is incident on the light guide plate B, the incident light can be uniformly irradiated to the region b. .

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the LED current flowing through the LED bar (LEDa) for illuminating the region a and the LED bar (LEDb) for illuminating the region b. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in this modification, the LED lighting phase is reversed between the LEDa and the LEDb, and the LED current of one LED bar is off during the period when the LED current is off (the period when the LED is off). The LED current of the LED bar is configured to be on (lighted state).

  More specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 92 (b), the LED current of LEDa rises on from the state in which the LED current of LEDa is off and the LED current of LEDb is on, and the LED current of LEDb Fall off. When a certain period of time (for example, 1.5 ms when the LED lighting frequency is 320 Hz and the ON period is 50%) elapses, the LED current of LEDa falls off and the LED current of LEDb rises on. Then, this state is maintained for a certain period (for example, 1.5 ms), and when the certain period elapses, the LED current of LEDa rises again and the LED current of LEDb falls off. Thereafter, the LED current of LEDa and the LED current of LEDb are switched on / off every 1.5 ms. Thereby, compared with the case where the ON period of LEDa and LEDb synchronizes, a peak current can be reduced. Moreover, the brightness | luminance of LEDa and the brightness | luminance of LEDb can be made equivalent by making ON period of LEDa and LEDb into the same length (50% in this specific example). That is, since the brightness of the appearance in the area a and the area b can be made equal, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the lighting frequency of the LCD backlight 230 is not limited to 320 Hz, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the player cannot recognize the on period and the off period. If the frequency is at least the update frequency of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (50 Hz in this embodiment) or more (that is, if one cycle of the on period and the off period is 20 milliseconds or less). The on period can be set at least once during the period in which each image is displayed. In other words, it is possible to prevent a part of the image displayed during the off period from becoming invisible when the period during which the part of the image is displayed coincides with the off period of the LCD backlight 230. Can do. Therefore, since all the images sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In this specific example, both the ON period and the OFF period of the LED current are set to 50%, and the apparent luminances of the region a and the region b are the same, but the luminance of the region b is darker than that of the region a. You may comprise as follows. For example, the period during which the LED current of the LEDa is on may be 80%, and the period during which the LED current is off may be 20%. And you may comprise so that LEDb may be lighted only during the OFF period of LEDa. This is because the area b provided on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81 is a portion that is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention, and therefore it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable even if the luminance is low.

  Alternatively, both the ON period and the OFF period of the LED current of LEDa may be kept 50%, and only the ON period of the LED current of LEDb may be shortened (for example, 20%). In other words, the LED current of the LEDb may be set to ON at a timing such that the ON period of the LEDb is included during a period of 1.5 ms when the LED current of the LEDa is turned off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the load current (power consumption) in the region b that is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention (that is, the player is less likely to recognize the change even if the luminance changes). Therefore, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the peak of the LED current value can be reduced more reliably.

  In FIG. 92 (b), LEDb is turned off at the same time that LEDa is turned on, and LEDb is turned on at the same time that LEDa is turned off. The timing for turning on the LED may be delayed. Thus, for example, even if LEDa falls off when LEDa is turned off (that is, even if the current value of LEDa does not turn off instantaneously), LEDb is set to on. While delaying, the current value of LEDa can be turned off. Therefore, it can suppress more reliably that LEDa and LEDb will be in the ON state simultaneously.

  This control is not limited to the LED of the LCD backlight 230. For example, the overall peak current of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by shifting the lighting phase of the LED for lighting (lighting units 29 to 33) provided at different positions. In addition, the brightness of the LED for lighting, which is placed relatively difficult for the player to notice, is made darker than the LED for lighting that is easy to enter the player's field of view, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Energy saving of the machine 10 can be achieved.

  The above-mentioned control is not limited to the same type of LEDs. For example, the lighting phase of the LED of the LCD backlight 230 is configured to be shifted from the lighting phase of the LED for illumination. The other LED may be configured to be turned on during the period when the LED is turned off. Further, the above control is not limited to the LED current value, and the timing for operating the accessory motor 229 and the lighting period of the LCD backlight 230 or the LED for lighting are controlled so as not to overlap. Further, it may be configured to prevent the current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 from instantaneously increasing by shifting the operation timing of each accessory motor 229 from each other.

  As a specific example of shifting the on period of the load current supplied to different configurations, a period in which the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is on, and a period in which the LED current value of the LED for illumination is on The case of shifting will be described in detail. In this specific example, the case where the LCD backlight 230 is electrically connected to the display control device 114 will be described as an example. That is, for the configuration controlled by different control devices (LED for lighting controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and LCD backlight 230 controlled by the display control device 114), the ON period of the supplied load current, An example of shifting the off period will be described. That is, when controlling the LED for lighting, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver. On the other hand, when the LCD backlight 230 is controlled, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 outputs a lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver.

  In this case, the LED on-time and off-time are set by the LED driver (lighting driver) provided in the LED for illumination and the LED driver (backlight driver) provided in the LCD backlight. If the reference signals (synchronization signals) for doing so do not match, the lighting periods may overlap with the passage of time. In other words, if the frequencies of the reference signals do not match, there is a possibility that the ON periods will overlap with the passage of time even if the ON periods do not overlap at the start of control. Moreover, even if the frequency of the reference signal is the same, if the generation timing of the reference signal is deviated, and the timing for starting the setting of the lighting state for each LED is deviated, the on-periods of each LED are There is a risk of duplication.

  Therefore, in this modification, the display control device 114 is configured to periodically output a synchronization signal to the sound lamp control device 113, and each LED (lighting) is based on the timing at which the synchronization signal is output. LED and LED of LCD backlight 230) are controlled to be turned on and off. That is, the same synchronization signal is output to the LED driver that drives the LED for illumination and the driver that drives the backlight 230 for LCD.

  As the synchronization signal, for example, a V interrupt signal (vertical synchronization interrupt signal) output by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds may be used. That is, the V interrupt signal configured to be output from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231 may be branched and output to the audio lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 and the MPU 231 may be configured to output the V interrupt signal as it is to the corresponding LED driver. As a result, the ON period and the OFF period can be set for each LED driver based on the same synchronization signal, so that the ON periods overlap each other and the load current (power consumption) instantaneously increases. The increase can be suppressed.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has information indicating that the ON period is 50% as the lighting control command to be output to the backlight driver (lighting rate data 80H, 128 sections of which one period is divided into 255 sections are ON). And the information that the synchronization signal (V interrupt signal) is externally input, and the first half of one cycle is set to the ON period (the ON period is started from the first section in each section that divides one period into 255 equal parts) The lighting control command including the information is set. As a result, the LCD backlight 230 is turned on at the same time as detecting the V interrupt signal, and the on state is maintained for 10 ms (50% of 20 ms, which is the generation period of the V interrupt signal). 230 can be set off until the next V interrupt signal.

  On the other hand, in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114, information indicating that the ON period is 50% (lighting rate data 7FH, 127 of which one cycle is divided into 255) with respect to the LED driver for driving the LED for illumination. And the information that the synchronization signal (V interrupt signal) is externally input, and the second half of one cycle is set to the ON period (one cycle is turned on from the 129th segment in each segment divided into 255 equal parts) Set the command that includes information such as “Start period”. As a result, the V interrupt signal is detected and the LED for lighting is turned off at the same time, and the off state is maintained for 10 ms (50% of 20 ms which is the generation period of the V interrupt signal), and then the LCD backlight 230 can be set on until the next V interrupt signal.

  By outputting the lighting control command described above to the corresponding LED driver, the on period and the off period can be reversed between the LED for illumination and the LCD backlight 230, so that each part of the pachinko machine 10 On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the load current (electric power) supplied from rising temporarily.

  The lighting control command for setting the lighting operation for the LED for lighting is associated with the setting timing of the command, and the lighting setting table (illustrated) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. None), the MPU 221 can easily select and set the lighting control command for executing the above control on the LED for lighting only by referring to this lighting setting table. it can.

  The lighting control command for setting the lighting operation for the LCD backlight 230 is defined as an LCD setting table in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in association with the setting timing of the command. (Refer to FIG. 45) and transferred to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 can easily select and set the lighting control command for causing the LED for illumination to execute the above-mentioned control simply by referring to the LCD setting table.

  Note that the control setting timing defined in the LED driver setting table and the lighting driver setting table is, for example, a timing of executing a light emission effect by the lighting LED. That is, when the lighting effect is executed by the LED for illumination, in order to cover the increase in load current for the LED for illumination, the backlight 230 for the LCD is turned off during the ON period of the LED for illumination. By matching the periods, it is possible to prevent the peak of the load current from rising instantaneously. Note that in a gaming machine in which the LED for lighting is always in a light-emitting state during the game, the power-on time may be defined as the setting timing of the control.

  As the LED driver, the above-described control may be employed using a driver that can specify the position and length of the on-period described above with a simpler lighting control command. That is, for each bit of 8-bit data, an LED driver that can accept a lighting control command that associates the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight may be used. In this case, as described above, in the LED driver of this aspect, when an 8-bit command is received, a section corresponding to a bit of 1 data is turned on, and a section corresponding to a bit of 0 is turned off. Control the LED to Further, as described above, sections that are earlier in time are associated in order from the lower bits of the 8-bit command. For example, if the control data is 0FH (that is, 00001111B in binary notation), among the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight equal parts, the first four sections are turned on and the latter four sections are turned off. Controlled.

  When this driver is adopted, an 8-bit command output from the MPU 231 to the LED driver of the LCD backlight 230 and an 8-bit command output from the MPU 221 to the LED for illumination are mutually “1”. The LED lighting control can be easily performed so that the lighting periods of each other do not overlap. The command may be defined separately in the illumination setting table (not shown) and the LCD setting table (not shown). For example, only the illumination setting table is provided, and the illumination setting table is provided. When the data setting timing specified in the above is reached, a lighting control command may be output to the LED driver corresponding to the LED for illumination and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Then, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to invert the “1” data and “0” data of each bit of the command and output a lighting control command to the LED driver corresponding to the LCD backlight 230. May be. For example, when “0FH” (that is, 00001111B in binary notation) is output as the lighting control command by the MPU 231, “1” data and “0” data of the lighting control command are output by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. By inversion, it is converted to a lighting control command “F0H” (that is, 11110000B in binary notation) and output to the LED driver. Thereby, the LCD backlight 230 can be turned on and the LED for illumination can be turned off in the first half of one cycle. Further, in the latter half of one cycle, the LCD backlight 230 can be turned off and the LED for lighting can be turned on. Therefore, since it can suppress that an ON period mutually overlaps, it can suppress that the load current (power consumption) supplied to each LED raises instantaneously. Further, it is only necessary to provide an illumination setting table, and the LCD setting table can be omitted, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Furthermore, this control can be realized even when a simpler LED driver that can accept only an LED on / off instruction (command) by the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 is used. That is, in the first 10 milliseconds of the V-interrupt signal generation interval (1 V period), the audio lamp control device 113 sets the lighting LEDs (lighting units 29 to 33) to ON and the display control device 114 displays the LCD. The backlight for lighting 230 may be set off, and the LED for lighting (lighting portions 29 to 33) may be set off and the LCD backlight 230 may be set on for the second 10 milliseconds of the 1V period. . More specifically, for example, in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the sound lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the V interrupt signal is received from the display control device 114, the LED for lighting is turned on. Configure to add processing to be set. On the other hand, in the display control device 114, a process for setting the LCD backlight 230 to be turned off is added in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) executed each time a V interrupt signal is detected. Configure. Thereby, the backlight 230 for LCD can be light-extinguished simultaneously with turning on LED for electrical decoration.

  Further, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to grasp the elapsed time since the V interrupt signal was detected, and when it is determined that 10 milliseconds have elapsed. The LED for illumination is turned off and the backlight 230 for LCD is turned on. Thereby, the backlight 230 for LCD can be turned on simultaneously with turning off the LED for illumination. Then, by repeating these processes, the lighting phase of the lighting LED (lighting units 29 to 33) and the lighting phase of the LCD backlight 210 can be reversed without providing a dedicated synchronization signal. it can. Therefore, since it can suppress that the LED for illumination (lighting part 29-33) and the backlight 230 for LCD are set to an ON state simultaneously, the load current supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 ( (Power consumption) can be prevented from increasing instantaneously.

  In addition, by setting the ON period and the OFF period of each LED with reference to the V interrupt signal output every 20 milliseconds, the LED for lighting (lighting units 29 to 33) and the backlight for LCD It is possible to prevent the lighting timing of the LED from deviating from 230. That is, even if the lighting timing of any LED in a certain 1V period shifts, the 1V period ends and the next V interrupt signal is received to cancel the deviation that occurred in the previous 1V period. And the ON period and the OFF period of each LED can be set based on the new V interrupt signal.

  It should be noted that a timer (such as a timer for measuring 10 milliseconds) is provided only in the voice lamp control device 113, and when the LED for lighting is turned off in the voice lamp control device 113, a command ( The turn-off command may be output to the display control device 114. Further, in the command interruption process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a turn-off command. A process for setting lighting of the LCD backlight 230 may be added. With this configuration, the display control device 114 does not need to determine the elapsed time after detecting the V-interrupt signal, so that the time measuring means can be omitted.

  Further, for example, each time the V interrupt signal is received, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to switch on and off the LED for lighting (lighting units 29 to 33), and the display control device 114. Then, every time the V interrupt signal is received, the LCD backlight 230 may be switched on and off at the timing opposite to that of the LED for lighting (lighting units 29 to 33). By switching the ON state and the OFF state of each LED in response to the reception of the V interrupt signal, it is possible to suppress a shift in the timing for setting each LED to the ON period or the OFF period. Moreover, since it is only necessary to switch the ON state and the OFF state of the LED controlled by each control device in response to the V interrupt signal, the elapsed time after receiving the V interrupt signal to each control device is determined. There is no need to provide a configuration for timing. Therefore, time measuring means can be reduced.

  Note that the synchronization signal for setting the on period and the off period of the LED is not limited to the V interrupt signal. For example, a synchronization signal that is output with a shorter cycle (for example, 3 milliseconds) than the V interrupt signal may be separately generated.

  Further, when generating a synchronization signal different from the V interrupt signal, the generation location of the synchronization signal is not limited to the display control device 114, and may be provided on the sound lamp control device 113 side. A clock means such as a crystal oscillator is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and a synchronization signal periodically output from the clock means is branched to the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Alternatively, each may be configured to output. By adopting a synchronization signal having a shorter cycle than the V interrupt signal (that is, a synchronization signal output at an interval shorter than the update interval of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81), one V interrupt The lighting period of the LCD backlight 230 can be set at least once during the 1 V period from when the display image is updated based on the signal until the next V interrupt signal is output. Therefore, the load current supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 increases instantaneously while displaying all the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the LCD backlight 230 turned on. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the on-period and the off-period do not necessarily have to be the same length when the on-period of the LED is shifted between the LCD backlight 230 and the illumination LEDs (lighting portions 29 to 33). For example, the on-period of the LCD backlight 230 may be made longer than the on-period of the LED for lighting (lighting units 29 to 33). Since the 3rd symbol display device 81 tends to concentrate a player's eyes | visual_axis (namely, it is easy to enter a visual field) compared with LED for illumination (lighting part 29-33), it is LED for illumination (lighting) Even if the ON period of the sections 29 to 33) is shortened (that is, even if the LED for lighting is dark), it is difficult for the player to notice. Therefore, it can suppress that a player holds discomfort with respect to the appearance of LED for electrical decoration. In addition, as a method of lengthening the ON period of the LCD backlight 230, for example, instead of making the ON period of the LCD backlight 230 longer than 50% (for example, 80%), an LED for lighting You may comprise so that the ON period of (lighting parts 29-33) may be shortened (for example, 20%). And what is necessary is just to comprise so that the other OFF period may be set to one ON period. Thereby, the period when the LED current is turned on can be shifted (distributed) while the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 is brightened. That is, it is possible to prevent the load current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 from increasing instantaneously.

  Further, as another method of extending the on-period of the LCD backlight 230, for example, the on-period of the LCD backlight 230 is set to 50%, and the on-period of the LED for lighting (lighting portions 29 to 33) is set. May be shortened (for example, 20%). And what is necessary is just to comprise so that the other OFF period may be set to one ON period. Thereby, it can suppress that a load current value becomes high instantaneously, reducing the load current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in this modification, the lighting frequency of the LED for illumination is matched with the lighting frequency of the backlight 230 for LCD (for example, 60 Hz or 320 Hz). If the lighting period of the light 230 does not overlap, it may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the lighting frequency of the LED for lighting may be halved with the lighting frequency of the backlight 230 for LCD, and the length of the on period may be halved. With this configuration, the on period of the LED for illumination is set once while the on period and the off period of the LCD backlight 230 are repeated twice. The on period of the LED for lighting is set during the off period of the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, since it can suppress that the ON period of each LED overlaps, it can suppress that the load current (power consumption) supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 increases temporarily.

  Moreover, in this modification, although the state which LED can take is made into any of an ON state and an OFF state, it is not restricted to this. For example, different current values can be set for each LED, and by setting the current values of other LEDs to low current values while some LEDs are set to high current values, You may suppress that the total load current value supplied to each part of the machine 10 increases instantaneously.

<Regarding Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, one or a plurality of actors that do not interfere with each other are grouped, and operating conditions are set in units of groups. In other words, in the case where the actors constituting one group are varied, the operation is performed only when the condition that does not interfere with other groups is established based on the operation condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b. The start was configured to be settable. In addition, each group is composed of an accessory that operates at the same time at the operation timing such as when the production starts (executes the same system of operation production). Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when returning to the origin, the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) (that is, the position where the output of the light shielding sensor first becomes H when the closing operation is performed from the opened / closed state) is performed. It was configured to return. That is, the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) is set as the origin position.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, the actors that may not interfere with all the other actors are grouped together (group 1), and the actors that may interfere with each other by being varied are grouped together. Are grouped (group 2). When the origin return operation is set, it is possible to return the origin in parallel to the group 1 accessory and the group 2 accessory. Thereby, the time required for the origin return can be shortened. Further, in this modification, the position where the opening / closing part is completely closed (see FIG. 71D) is configured to be the origin position without changing the position and number of the light shielding sensors. In other words, the origin position of the opening / closing part is set to a closed state that occupies most of the normal game, and the position in the closed state can be detected based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor for switching the light emitting part on and off It is composed.

<Electrical Configuration of Modification of Third Embodiment>
First, the operation start condition table 222b provided in the ROM 222 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the operation start condition table 222b of the present modification, the type of the accessory constituting each group is changed with respect to the operation start condition table 222b of the third embodiment. Specifically, hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940, nail-shaped objects 1063, and half-moon-shaped objects 1060 are group 2. In addition, movable objects other than these are set as group 1. In addition, the accessory which belongs to the group 1 is comprised with the accessory which does not have a possibility of interfering with another accessory, such as an accessory which rocks on the spot, for example. Therefore, no operation start condition is set in the operation start condition table 222b for the group 1. Also, no operating conditions are provided for the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 because no interference occurs with other objects, but it is necessary to execute relatively complicated control when returning to the origin. Therefore, it belongs to group 2.

  On the other hand, the claw-like accessory 1063 and the half-moon accessory 1060 belonging to the group 2 are each provided with an operation start condition. Specifically, as a condition for starting the operation of the claw-shaped accessory 1063, it is defined that the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is at the origin position or the overhang position. In addition, as a condition for starting the operation of the crescent-shaped accessory 1060, it is defined that the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is at the origin position. By following these operating conditions, the objects can be operated without causing them to interfere with each other.

  Next, the origin return operation table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. In the origin return operation table 222f of this modification, three types of operation scenarios are defined. In each operation scenario, any one of the objects belonging to group 2 is set to perform an origin return operation. In addition, each operation scenario is configured such that the return to origin is set in parallel with each accessory in group 2 for the accessory in group 1. Based on this origin return operation table 222f, the origin return operation of each accessory can be set efficiently. As described above, when the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is operated in a state where the nail-shaped accessory 1063 is in the overhanging position, the nail-shaped features 1063 exposed from the upper and lower half-moon shaped features 1060 are respectively in contact with each other. There is a risk of interference with the rotation of the half-moon-shaped accessory. For this reason, in the present modification, the claw-like accessory 1063 is first returned to the origin position (operation scenario 2), and then the half-moon shaped accessory 1060 is returned to the origin. Thereby, the interference of an accessory can be suppressed.

  Next, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of this embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 of the present embodiment is provided with an operation scenario execution flag 223n and an initial operation flag 223o in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the third embodiment.

  The operation scenario execution flag 223n indicates whether or not each accessory is varied according to the operation scenario for setting the operation of the accessory, like the operation scenario execution flag 223n in the modification of the first embodiment. Flag. In the modification of the first embodiment, the operation in accordance with the operation scenario is set in the power supply return operation of the accessory executed after the return of the origin of the accessory is completed. In the return, an operation according to the operation scenario is set. That is, the operation scenario execution flag 223n of the present modification is configured to be turned on when an operation in accordance with the operation scenario is set in the origin return (see S1233 in FIG. 94).

  The initial operation flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the return to origin of the accessory belonging to the group 1 is being executed. If the initial operation flag 223o is on, it indicates that the return to origin of the accessory belonging to the group 1 is being executed. If the initial operation flag 223o is off, the return to origin of the group 1 has not been performed (before the return to origin is executed). Or after the return to origin is completed). The initial operation flag 223o is set to ON when group 1 origin return is set (see S1227 in FIG. 94), and is set to OFF when group 1 origin return is completed (see S1239 in FIG. 94). ).

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Modified Example of Third Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98. First, with reference to FIG. 94, the origin return process (S1141) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of this modification will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the origin return process 3 (S1141).

  The origin return process 3 is a process executed in place of the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the third embodiment in the start-up process (see FIG. 37). This is a process for returning.

  In the origin return process 3 (see FIG. 94), first, an operation scenario execution flag 223n indicating whether or not an action of an accessory based on any of the operation scenarios defined in the origin return operation table 222f is set. The state is determined (S1221). As described above, if this operation scenario execution flag 233n is on, it indicates that the operation is being executed according to each operation scenario defined in the origin return operation table 222f, and if it is off, the operation scenario Indicates that the specified operation has not been executed.

  If it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is not on (S1221: No), it means that no operation scenario is set. Next, the origin return operation table 222f is read to update the operation scenario ( S1222), the updated operation scenario is read (S1223). Then, it is determined whether or not the read operation scenario is END information (S1224). If the read operation scenario is END information (S1224: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the read operation scenario is not END information (S1224: No), it is determined whether or not it is a group 1 operation start scenario (operation scenario 1) (S1225).

  In the process of S1225, when it is determined that the operation start scenario of the group 1 (that is, the operation scenario 1) (S1225: Yes), the initial operation command of the group 1 is set to change the role of the group 1 The operation is started (S1226), the initial operation flag 223o is set to ON to indicate that the group 1 is returning to the origin (S1227), and the process proceeds to S1228. As described above, the initial operation flag 223o is a flag indicating that a group 1 accessory is returning to the origin if it is on, and indicating that the origin return of the group 1 is not being performed if it is off. is there. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1225 that the operation scenario is not the group 1 (S1224), the process proceeds to S1228.

  In the processing of S1228, it is determined whether or not the operation scenario read from the origin return operation table 222f is the origin return (operation scenario 2) of the claw-like accessory 1063 (S1228), and the return operation of the claw-like accessory 1063 is performed. When performing, the nail-like accessory return process is executed (S1231), and the process proceeds to S1233. In addition, when the read operation scenario is not the origin return (operation scenario 2) of the claw-like accessory 1063 (S1228: No), it is an operation scenario (operation scenario 3) for performing the origin return of the half-moon shaped object 1060. (S1229), if the scenario returns to the origin of the half-moon shaped object 1060 (that is, the operation scenario 3) (S1229), the half-moon shaped object return process is executed (S1232), and the process proceeds to S1233. And migrate the process.

  On the other hand, when the read scenario is neither the return to origin of the claw-like accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) nor the return to origin of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 (operation scenario 3) (S1228: No, S1229: No), the read This means that the operation scenario is a scenario (operation scenario 1) indicating the return operation of the hemispherical actors 910, 920, 930, and 940, so hemispherical actor return processing is performed (S1230), and the processing proceeds to S1233. Transition. In the subsequent process of S1233, the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to ON (S1233), and the process proceeds to S1221. Thereafter, the processes of S1221 to S1233 and the processes of S1234 to S1241, which will be described later, are repeated until the END information is read from the origin return operation table 222f.

  In the processing of S1221, when it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is on (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the initial operation flag 223o is on (S1234), and if it is on (S1234: Yes), it means that the origin return of the accessory belonging to the group 1 is being executed, so it is determined whether the origin sensor corresponding to the accessory of the group 1 is ON (S1235). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S1235: Yes), the stop of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the origin sensor that has detected the on is set (S1336), and the accessory is stopped. The origin position is set by setting the step counter to 0 (S1337). Then, it is determined whether or not the return to origin of all the belongings belonging to group 1 has been completed (S1338). If it is determined that the return to origin has been completed (S1338: Yes), the initial operation flag 223o is set to OFF. (S1239), the process proceeds to S1240. On the other hand, if any of the actors in group 1 is returning to the origin (S1338: No), the process of S1239 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1240.

  If the initial operation flag 223o is off in the processing of S1234, it indicates that it is out of the period for executing the origin return for the group 1, so the processing of S1235 to S1239 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1240. And migrate. Further, in the processing of S1235, when it is determined that the origin sensor corresponding to any one of the members in group 1 is OFF (S1235: No), the character belonging to group 1 is in a position off the origin. Since it means that there is a certain accessory (return to origin has not been completed yet), the processing of S1236 to S1239 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1240.

  In the process of S1240, it is determined whether or not the operation of group 2 has been completed (S1240). If the operation has been completed (S1240: Yes), the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to OFF (S1241), and the process is performed in S1221. Migrate to If the operation of group 2 has not ended (S1240: No), the process proceeds to S1221.

  By executing this processing, it is possible to return the origin of each of the groups 2 in parallel while performing the return-to-origin operation of the actors in group 1, thereby shortening the period required for the return to origin.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, hemispherical accessory return processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this hemispherical accessory return process. This hemispherical accessory return process is a process for returning the origin of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. In the present embodiment, the origin position is in the closed state shown in FIG.

  In this hemispherical accessory return process (see FIG. 95), two processes are roughly divided. That is, after executing the process of returning the opening / closing portion to the position shown in FIG. 71C (detection start position of the light shielding sensor) (S4401 to S4411), the opening / closing portion is set to the origin position from the arrangement of FIG. 71C. A process (origin position setting process) of returning to the position where the opening / closing part is completely closed (see FIG. 71 (d)) is executed. These processes will be specifically described.

  In the hemispherical accessory return process, first, it is determined whether or not the light shielding sensor is on (S4401). That is, it is determined whether or not the hemispherical object to be set is at a position within 5 steps from the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)). If it is determined that the light-shielding sensor is on (S4401: Yes), an operation command for operating the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction (in the direction to open the opening / closing portion) by one step is then issued. And output to the motor driver that drives the accessory motor 229. And it waits until it receives an execution signal from a motor driver (S4403: No). That is, it waits until the set operation for one step is completed. If an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4404: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor is L (off) (S4404). That is, by operating the accessory motor 229 for one step, it is determined whether or not it is in a more open state than the arrangement shown in FIG. The opening / closing portion is opened until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L (off) because the position of the opening / closing portion cannot be accurately determined while the output of the light shielding sensor is H (on). is there. Therefore, the opening / closing part is configured to be retracted (opening operation) outside the range where the light shielding sensor is H (ON). Since the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) by the closing operation is once moved to the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor once becomes L (off), the position shown in FIG. The opening / closing part can be accurately changed to the position shown in FIG. 71 (c).

  If it is determined by the process of S4404 that the output of the light shielding sensor is H (on) (S4404: No), the process proceeds to S4402, and thereafter, until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L (off) S4402. Each process of .about.S4404 is repeated. If it is determined by the processing of S4404 that the output of the light shielding sensor is L (off) (S4405: Yes), this means that the output from the output start position of the light shielding sensor is open. In order to set an accurate number of steps until closing, a process of returning to the position of FIG. 71 (c) which is the detection start position of the sensor is executed.

  Specifically, first, an operation command is set so as to operate for one step in the negative direction (direction in which the opening / closing part is closed) (S4406). Then, it waits until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4406: No), and when the execution signal is received (S4406: Yes), it means that the accessory motor 229 has operated one step. It is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4407). That is, it is determined whether or not the arrangement shown in FIG. If the output of the light shielding sensor remains in the H (on) state (S4407: No), the processing of S4405 to S4407 is repeated until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L (off).

  In the process of S4407, when it is determined that the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4407: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the detection start position of the light shielding sensor has been reached, the origin position setting process is executed. In step S4408, the process is terminated. This origin position setting process is a process for setting the open / close section in the closed state, which is the origin position of this modification, and setting the origin position in the step counter. Details of the origin position setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4401 that the light-shielding sensor is not on (that is, it is off) (S4401: No), a command for operating the accessory motor 229 in the negative direction by one step is then sent to the motor driver. Setting is made (S4409). Then, it waits until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4410), and when it is determined that the execution signal is received from the motor driver (that is, the accessory motor 229 has operated one step) (S4410: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4411).

  In the process of S4411, when it is determined that the light shielding sensor is L (off) (S4411: No), the processes of S4409 to S4411 are repeated until the output of the light shielding sensor is H (on). That is, the accessory motor 229 is operated step by step until the arrangement shown in FIG. If the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4411: Yes), the origin position setting process (S4408) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Thus, in this process, when the opening / closing part is outside the detection range of the light shielding sensor when the power is turned on, the opening / closing part is closed step by step until the light shielding sensor detects H (ON). Therefore, it is always possible to stop at the arrangement shown in FIG. If the opening / closing part is within the detection range of the light shielding sensor when the power is turned on, the opening / closing part is opened step by step until the light shielding sensor detects L (off), and the opening / closing part is temporarily opened. It is configured to operate outside the detection range. Then, similarly to the origin return operation when the sensor detects L (off) when the power is turned on, the opening / closing part is closed step by step, and also in this case, the operation is stopped with the arrangement of FIG. 71 (c). Can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately return to the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)) by operating the same number of steps (5 steps in the direction of closing the opening / closing portion) in the subsequent processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the origin position setting process (S4408), which is one process in the hemispherical accessory return process described above, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the origin position setting process (S4408).

  In the origin position setting process (S4408), first, a step counter value of the hemispherical accessory is set to 5 (S4501), and then a command for operating the negative direction (direction for closing the opening / closing portion) by 5 steps is issued. Output to the motor driver (S4502). Thereby, it can be changed to the closed position (refer FIG.71 (d)) in the position operated only 5 steps from arrangement | positioning of FIG.71 (c). When the processing of S4502 is completed, the process waits until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4503: No). The counter is decremented by 1 (S4504). As a result, the number of remaining operation steps can be matched with the step counter value.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter is 0 (S4505). If it is determined that the value is not 0, the processes of S4503 to S4505 are repeated until the value of the step counter becomes 0. When the value of the step counter becomes 0 (that is, when the home position is closed), a stop control command for the accessory motor 229 is set to operate the accessory motor 229. The process is terminated (S4506). By setting this stop command, the accessory motor 229 can be reliably stopped at the origin position without excessively operating.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a claw-like accessory returning process for returning the claw-like accessory 1063 to the origin will be described. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4601). If the origin sensor is off (S4601: No), the accessory motor 229 is only one step in the negative direction (origin direction). An operation command for moving is set (S4602). Next, the process waits until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4603: No). If an execution signal is received (S4603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor of the claw-like accessory 1063 is on. (S4604). If the origin sensor is off (S4604: No), the processing from S4602 to S4603 is repeated until the original sensor detects on.

  In the process of S4601 or S4604, when it is detected that the origin sensor is on, the process proceeds to S4605. In the process of S4605, 0 is set to the value of the step counter of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (S4605), a stop control command for the accessory motor 229 is set (S4606), and this process ends. By executing this process, the claw-like accessory 1063 can be accurately returned to the origin position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a half-moon shaped object return process (S1232), which is a process for returning the half-moon shaped object 1060 to the origin, will be described. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4701). If the origin sensor is off (S4701: No), the accessory motor 229 is only one step in the negative direction (origin direction). An operation command for moving is set (S4702). Next, the process waits until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4703: No). If an execution signal is received (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor of the half-moon shaped object 1060 is on. (S4704). If the origin sensor is off (S4704: No), the processing from S4702 to S4703 is repeated until the origin sensor detects on.

  If it is detected in S4701 or S4704 that the origin sensor is ON, the process proceeds to S4705. In the process of S4705, 0 is set to the value of the step counter of the half-moon type accessory 1060 (S4705), a stop control command for the accessory motor 229 is set (S4706), and this process ends. By executing this process, the half-moon shaped object 1060 can be accurately returned to the origin position.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, it is possible to perform the return-to-origin operation on the group 1 accessory and the group 2 accessory in parallel. Also, in this modification, when the opening / closing part of the hemispherical accessory is returned to the origin, the operation direction when the origin return operation is performed is varied according to the detection result of the light shielding sensor when the power is turned on. In either case, after the operation is always performed to the position shown in FIG. 71 (c), the 5-step operation is set in the accessory motor 229, so that the origin position in the closed state can be set. That is, before operating to the origin position, it is possible to determine where the origin position is based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor, and to set the number of operation steps corresponding to the origin position. Therefore, even if the origin position is not the detection start position of the light shielding sensor (see FIG. 71C), the origin can be accurately returned. As described above, the origin position is determined from the detection start position of the light shielding sensor (see FIG. 71 (c)) as a starting point, which leads to an increase in circuit scale such as providing an origin sensor separately from the light shielding sensor. Therefore, the opening / closing part can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  In the present modification, the output of the light shielding sensor is in the H state from the state where the open / close portions of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 are closed to the origin position shown in FIG. 71 (c). The position of the light shielding sensor is set as described above, but is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the opening / closing part is opened and in the closed state, the light-shielding sensor is in the L output state, and the transition from the closed state to the open state is in progress (the transition from the open state to the closed state). The shading sensor may be configured to be in the H output state at the position. In this case, when the origin return is performed, the boundary position where the output of the light shielding sensor is switched from L (off) to H (on) is searched by alternately operating the open state side and the closed state side. The number of steps from the position to the closed position may be set and the operation may be performed so as to return to the origin position.

  In order to explain more specifically, the case where the opening / closing part is arranged so that the output of the light-shielding sensor is H within the range of the fifth step to the tenth step from the origin position will be described as an example. First, when the output of the light shielding sensor is H (on) when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the opening / closing part is closed step by step until the light shielding sensor output becomes L (off) (origin position). When the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L (off), the opening operation is performed until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes H (on). As a result, the opening / closing part can be moved to the position of the fifth step from the origin position. Therefore, the opening / closing part can be easily returned to the origin position by setting the opening / closing part to be operated in five steps toward the origin position. .

  On the other hand, if the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) when the power is turned on, repeat the opening operation and the closing operation, and gradually increase the number of operation steps for one opening operation or closing operation. As a result, the position where the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) is searched. For example, if the output of the light-shielding sensor is left at L (off) at first, the opening / closing part is returned to the original position (position when the power is turned on). Closes only minutes. If the output of the light-shielding sensor remains L (off), the opening / closing part is returned to the original position (position when the power is turned on) again, and then the two-step opening / closing is started from the original position. Perform an action and a two-step closing action. Then, the number of operation steps from the original position is increased until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes H (on), and the opening operation and the closing operation are alternately repeated. By searching for the detection position of the light-shielding sensor while increasing the amplitude one step at a time, it is possible to suppress an excessive opening or closing when the opening / closing part is operated in the direction opposite to the origin position.

  If the output of the light shielding sensor becomes H (ON) during the opening operation, it means that the opening / closing part is within the detection range of the light shielding sensor by opening from the origin position to the position of the fifth step. Therefore, the opening / closing part can be returned to the origin position by setting a five-step closing operation. On the other hand, when the output of the light shielding sensor becomes H (on) during the closing operation, it means that the opening / closing part is within the detection range of the light shielding sensor by closing from the origin position to the position of the 10th step. Therefore, the opening / closing part can be returned to the origin position by setting the 10-step closing operation.

  As described above, even when the origin position does not exist within the detection range of the light shielding sensor, if the number of steps from the detection range of the light shielding sensor to the origin position is known, the opening / closing unit is opened based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. It can be easily returned to the origin position. In the above specific example, the example in which the amplitude of the closing operation and the opening operation is increased in increments of one step when the light shielding sensor is L (off) when the power is turned on has been described. It is good also as a step or 5 steps. As the number of steps is increased, the time required for the opening / closing portion to enter the detection range of the light shielding sensor can be shortened, so that the time required for returning to the origin can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, a driving load reference value is defined for each type of accessory, and it is determined whether or not to cancel the operation of the accessory based on the driving load reference value. is not. For example, it may be determined whether or not to cancel the operation of the accessory based on the number of the accessory motors 229 to be operated, the number of commands for operating the accessory, the voltage value, and the like.

  In each of the above embodiments, the operation of each accessory is set by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 (the accessory motor 229 is driven). You may comprise so that operation | movement may be controlled. In other words, the accessory motor 229 may be configured to be electrically connected to the main controller 110. In the second embodiment, the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. However, the luminance may be controlled by the MPU 110 of the main control device 110. . That is, the LCD backlight 230 may be electrically connected to the main controller 110. As a result, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, a liquid crystal display is employed as the third symbol display device 81, but is not limited thereto. For example, a PDP (plasma display panel), an organic EL display, a cathode ray tube display, or the like may be employed. Since these are self-luminous displays and do not include a backlight, when reducing the luminance as in the second embodiment, the brightness of the display is reduced by controlling the light emitting elements themselves. Thus, the load current (power consumption) may be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, only one third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display) is provided, but a plurality of third symbol display devices 81 may be provided. For example, two types of a main display and a sub display having a screen size smaller than the main display may be provided. Thereby, since the freedom degree of a display effect increases more, an effect can be heightened more. Further, for example, the position of the sub display may be variable. Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by operating the accessory, the display effect is executed only on the sub display, and the main display is turned off. The load current (power consumption) that is supplied to the display may be reduced, and the current capacity (rated power) may be within the range. Further, when the main display is turned off, the position of the sub display may be changed, and the sub display may be arranged at the position of the main display. Thereby, the uncomfortable feeling that the main display is turned off can be reduced, and the player can be recognized as a kind of production.

  In each of the above embodiments, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. However, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied and the power is shut off. Also, the stored contents may be held. As a result, when the power is cut off during the production, it is possible to determine the progress of the production when the power is turned off after the power is turned on, and the production can be continued from the beginning. be able to.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group> (A limit is set on the total drive current of the accessory motor)
At least one of a plurality of variable members driven by the power supply means, a plurality of variable members driven by the power supply means, a plurality of variable members variable by the variable means, and the variable members; A power discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the power required to drive the corresponding variable unit exceeds a predetermined power, and the power discriminating unit exceeds the predetermined power. A gaming machine A1 comprising: the variable means that is being driven when it is determined; and a drive suppression means that suppresses at least a part of the variable means to be newly driven.

  Here, some game machines such as a pachinko machine include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of presentation operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the plurality of variable means are driven based on the power supplied by the power supply means, and the variable members are variable by the variable means. When at least a part of the plurality of variable members is varied, the power determining unit determines whether or not the power required to drive the corresponding variable unit exceeds a predetermined power. When it is determined by the power determining means that the predetermined power is exceeded, at least a part of the driving variable means and the newly driven variable means is suppressed by the drive suppressing means.

  Thereby, it can suppress that electric power increases too much by driving a variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the variable means can be operated appropriately.

  In the gaming machine A1, storage means for storing power information, which is information according to the power for driving each variable means, and all the variable to be driven based on the power information stored in the storage means. Calculating means for calculating a total power value that is a value corresponding to a total value of power of the means, wherein the power discriminating means is configured so that the power required for driving the variable means based on the total power value is calculated in advance. A gaming machine A2 that is configured to determine whether or not a predetermined electric power is exceeded.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, power information, which is information corresponding to the power for driving each variable means, is stored in the storage means, and based on the power information stored in the storage means, the total power of all the variable means to be driven The total power value, which is a value corresponding to the value, is calculated by the calculation means. Based on the total power value, it is determined by the power determining means whether or not the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power.

  As a result, when calculating the total power value corresponding to the total value of the power supplied to the variable means to be driven, it is only necessary to read and sum the power information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the circuit scale of the gaming machine.

  The gaming machine A2 includes drive power storage means for storing a value corresponding to the total value of power of the variable means being driven, and the calculation means newly drives the value stored in the drive power storage means The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the total power value is calculated based on the power information corresponding to the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, a value corresponding to the total value of the power of the variable means being driven is stored in the drive power storage means, and the value stored in the drive power storage means and the power information corresponding to the newly driven variable means. Based on this, the total power value is calculated by the calculating means.

  As a result, only the power information corresponding to the variable means to be newly driven needs to be read from the storage means, and every time the variable means is newly driven, the power information of all the variable means being driven needs to be read from the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load of calculation processing in the calculation means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the drive suppression unit newly drives when it is determined by the power determination unit that the power required to drive the variable unit exceeds the predetermined power A gaming machine A4 that suppresses driving of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the power discriminating means determines that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power, Since the driving of the variable means to be driven is suppressed by the drive suppressing means, it is possible to prevent the variable member from stopping during the operation by stopping the driving variable means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that a trouble has occurred in the gaming machine by stopping the variable member in the middle of the operation.

  In the gaming machine A4, there is storage control means for controlling the total power value calculated by the calculation means to be stored in the driving power storage means, and electric power required for driving the variable means by the power determination means. And a storage control suppression unit that suppresses the storage control unit from controlling the total power value to be stored in the drive power storage unit when it is determined that the predetermined power is exceeded. A gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the total power value calculated by the calculation means is controlled to be stored in the drive power storage means by the storage control means. The storage control means that the storage control means controls to store the total power value in the drive power storage means when it is determined by the power determination means that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power. It is suppressed by the suppression means.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the power information corresponding to the variable means that has been suppressed from being added from being added to the total power value, so that it is not necessary to subtract the power information once added to the total power value. Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the display device includes a display unit that displays a display effect, and a display control unit that controls display contents to be displayed on the display unit. The display control unit is being driven by the drive suppression unit. Control is performed so that when the drive of a part or all of the variable means and the newly driven variable means is suppressed, the display means displays an effect corresponding to the variable means for which the drive is suppressed. A gaming machine A6 that is possible.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the display effect is displayed by the display means, and the display content displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means. When some or all of the variable means being driven and the newly driven variable means are suppressed by the drive control means, an effect corresponding to the variable means whose drive is suppressed is displayed on the display means. In this way, it is controlled by the display control means.

  Thereby, even if the driving of the variable means is suppressed, the corresponding effect is displayed on the display means, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the driving of the variable means is suppressed. .

  In the gaming machine A1, the power discriminating unit discriminates whether or not the predetermined threshold is exceeded based on the number of the variable unit being driven and the number of the variable unit to be newly driven. A gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the power discriminating means determines whether or not a predetermined threshold is exceeded based on the number of variable means being driven and the number of variable means to be newly driven. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the predetermined power is exceeded by a simple process of counting the number of variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the discrimination processing by the power discrimination means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the drive suppression means repeats variable operation and operation stop for at least two or more specific variable means among the variable means being driven and the variable means to be newly driven, and at least 1 The power required to drive the variable means is suppressed to a predetermined power or less by variably operating the other specific variable means during a period in which the specific variable means is stopped. A gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least two or more specific variable means among the variable means being driven and the variable means to be newly driven are repeatedly operated and stopped by the drive suppressing means. The other specific variable means is variably operated by the drive suppressing means during a period when the operation of at least one specific variable means is stopped.

  This makes it possible for the player to recognize that all the variable means including the specific variable means are operating without being stopped, thus making the player feel uncomfortable with the operation of the variable means. Can be suppressed.

<Characteristic B group> (Reduce the power of the backlight to secure the power for the operation of the accessory)
Control means for controlling the game, display means for displaying display information, brightness variable capable of changing at least the brightness of the display means to a first brightness and a second brightness that is darker than the first brightness And the brightness variable means is capable of changing the brightness of the display means to the second brightness when a condition for executing a specific control by the control means is satisfied. A gaming machine B1 to play.

  Here, some game machines such as a pachinko machine include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of presentation operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the number of variable members is increased in order to enhance the effect, there is a possibility that the process for operating the variable members cannot be performed normally. That is, it may be difficult to control the gaming machine appropriately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, control related to the game is performed by the control means. Display information is displayed by the display means, and the luminance of the display means is changed at least by the luminance variable means to a first luminance and a second luminance that is darker than the first luminance. When the condition for executing the specific control is established by the control means, the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness changing means.

  As a result, even if the power required for the control increases by performing the specific control, it can be offset by the power reduced by changing the display means to the second luminance, so that the specific control is surely executed. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming machine can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine B1, a power supply means for supplying power to the control means and the display means, and a power determination means for determining whether or not the power supplied by the power supply means exceeds a predetermined power And the brightness varying means adjusts the brightness of the display means when the power discriminating means determines that the predetermined power is exceeded by executing the specific control by the control means. A gaming machine B2 that is variable to the second luminance.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, power is supplied to the control means and the display means by the power supply means, and whether or not the power supplied by the power supply means exceeds a predetermined power is determined by the power determination means. When the power discriminating unit determines that the predetermined power is exceeded by executing the specific control by the control unit, the luminance varying unit varies the luminance of the display unit to the second luminance.

  Thereby, even if specific control is performed, electric power can be made into below predetermined electric power. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction in the gaming machine by exceeding the predetermined power.

  The gaming machine B3 or B2 includes a plurality of variable members that can be changed, and the specific control is control for changing part or all of the plurality of variable members.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific control is control for changing part or all of the plurality of variable members. Even when the variable member is mounted, there is an effect that when the variable member is varied, the power can be set to be equal to or lower than a predetermined power.

  In the gaming machine B3, when performing control for varying part or all of the plurality of variable members, the game machine B3 includes control suppression means capable of suppressing control for varying at least some of the variable members, The control suppressing means is at least partially when the power determining means determines that the predetermined power exceeds the predetermined power even after the brightness changing means changes the brightness of the display means to the second brightness. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that it controls the predetermined power or less by suppressing control for varying the variable member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when executing control for changing part or all of the plurality of variable members, control for changing at least some of the variable members is suppressed by the control suppressing means. Control is performed to change at least some of the variable members when it is determined by the power determining means that the predetermined power exceeds the predetermined power even after the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness changing means. It is suppressed by the suppression means.

  Thereby, even if a brighter luminance is set as the second luminance, there is an effect that the gaming machine can be operated so as not to exceed a predetermined power by performing the control by the control suppressing means.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the control means controls the plurality of variable members to perform a turning-on operation that is a predetermined action based on power-on, and the brightness varying means The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the control means controls the plurality of variable members to perform a turning-on operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on. Based on power-on, the luminance of the display means is changed to the second luminance by the luminance variable means.

  Thereby, since it is set to the 2nd brightness | luminance at the time of making operation | movement, there exists an effect that it can suppress exceeding predetermined electric power during making operation | movement.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the brightness changing means changes the brightness of the display means to the first brightness after the specific control is finished.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the brightness of the display means is changed to the first brightness by the brightness changing means after the specific control is finished. The period set for the luminance can be set to the minimum period. Therefore, the luminance of the display unit can be set to the first luminance that is brighter than the second luminance for a longer period, so that the appearance quality of the display unit can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, the brightness varying means sets the brightness of the display means until the predetermined time elapses by increasing the brightness according to the elapsed time after the specific control is finished. A gaming machine B7 that is variable in luminance.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, after the specific control is finished, the luminance is increased according to the elapsed time by the luminance variable means, and until the predetermined time elapses, Since the luminance is changed to the first luminance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance as compared to the case where the switching from the second luminance to the first luminance is instantaneously performed. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, when the luminance of the display unit is varied by the luminance variable unit, a display control unit that can be controlled to display a black image on the entire display unit is provided. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of B1 to B7, when the brightness of the display means is varied by the brightness varying means, the display control means controls to display a black image on the entire display means. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the luminance has changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the display means includes a display panel and a light source that illuminates the display panel, and the brightness varying means PWMs the brightness of the light source. A gaming machine B9 that is variable by control.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the following effects are produced. That is, the display means includes a display panel and a light source that illuminates the display panel. The brightness of the light source is varied by PWM control by the brightness varying means.

  Thereby, the brightness can be varied by a simple control of repeatedly turning on and off the light source. Therefore, since a simple circuit can be adopted as a circuit for executing control of the light source, there is an effect that the cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the display unit includes a display panel and a light source configured by an LED that illuminates the display panel, and the brightness varying unit includes A gaming machine B10, wherein the brightness of the light source is varied by varying the LED drive current.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the following effects are produced. That is, the display means is configured to include a display panel and a light source composed of LEDs that illuminate the display panel. By varying the LED driving current, the luminance of the light source is varied by the luminance varying means.

  As a result, when the brightness is reduced to the same level as in PWM control, the anode voltage of the LED can be reduced as the LED drive current decreases, so that the power of the light source can be further reduced compared to PWM control. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that energy saving of the gaming machine can be achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the luminance variable means includes a plurality of area luminance variable means for changing the luminance of a partial area of the display means, and the plurality of variable members Includes a specific variable member that, when varied based on control by the control means, shields a part of the display means by changing the game board to the front side of the display means, The brightness varying means, when the specific variable member is variable, changes the brightness of an area partially or entirely shielded by the specific variable member to the second brightness by the corresponding area brightness variable means. A gaming machine B11 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the following effects are produced. That is, the luminance variable means is provided with a plurality of area luminance variable means for changing the luminance of a partial area of the display means. The plurality of variable members include a specific variable member in which a part of the display means is shielded by being changed to the front side of the display means with respect to the game board when being changed based on control by the control means. When the specific variable member changes, the luminance of the region partially or entirely shielded by the specific variable member is changed to the second luminance by the corresponding region luminance variable means.

  Thereby, only the luminance of the area that is shielded by the specific variable member and cannot be visually recognized by the player is set as the second luminance, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the luminance has changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the display means.

<Characteristic C group> (The feature is divided into a group in which the features interfere with each other and a group in which the features do not interfere with each other, and the control of the feature motor according to the group is executed)
A first member group composed of one or a plurality of variable members that can be varied, a second member group composed of one or a plurality of the variable members different from the first member group, and the variable members are varied. And the variable member constituting the first member group is arranged at a position where the variable member does not interfere with the other variable member by being varied, and the second member group At least two of the variable members are arranged at positions where they can interfere with each other by being variable, and the variable means preliminarily changes the variable members of the second member group when the variable members are variable. A gaming machine C1 that is variable in accordance with predetermined operating conditions.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are those that include a combination that operates with a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of actors (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first member group is composed of one or more variable members that can be varied, and the second member group is composed of one or more variable members that are different from the first member group. The variable member is variable by the variable means. The variable members constituting the first member group are arranged at positions that do not interfere with other variable members by being varied. The at least two variable members constituting the second member group are arranged at positions where they can interfere with each other by being varied. When the variable member constituting the second member group is varied by the variable means, the variable member is varied according to a predetermined operating condition.

  As a result, the operating conditions for the variable members constituting the second member group need only be specified, and the specified operating conditions can be minimized. That is, the process for changing the variable member can be simplified. Therefore, there is an effect that the variable member can be suitably varied.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the operating condition is a condition for changing the variable member constituting the second member group, the other variable member constituting the second member group is in a position where it does not interfere. The game machine C2 is characterized in that a condition for making the variable member variable is included.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the operating conditions include other variable members constituting the second member group as conditions for varying the variable members constituting the second member group. Since the condition for making the variable member variable is included when the variable member is in a position where it does not interfere, there is an effect that the variable members constituting the second member group can be prevented from interfering with each other.

  In the gaming machine C2, when the variable member is variable based on the specific information by the variable information storage means for storing the specific information that defines the type of variable member to be changed for each production, the operating condition Condition determining means for determining whether or not is satisfied, and the variable member defined in the defining information by the variable means when the condition determining means determines that the operating condition is not satisfied. And an avoiding means for avoiding the change of the game machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the regulation information that defines the type of variable member to be varied for each effect is stored in the regulation information storage means. When the variable member is varied based on the regulation information by the variable means, it is determined by the condition determination means whether or not the operating condition is satisfied. When the condition determining means determines that the operating condition is not satisfied, the avoidance means avoids the change of the variable member specified in the specifying information by the variable means.

  Thereby, it can suppress more reliably that a variable member interferes. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as damage to the variable member due to interference.

  In gaming machine C3, gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the regulation information defines the type of the variable means to be varied in association with the elapsed time from the start of the production.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the regulation information defines the type of variable means that can be varied in association with the elapsed time from the start of the production. The variable means corresponding to the effect can be varied by a simple process of selecting the type of means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load for changing the variable means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the regulation information defines information indicating whether or not the variable member belonging to the second member group is included in the variable member to be varied. A gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the regulation information defines information indicating whether or not variable members belonging to the second member group are included in the variable members to be varied. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is necessary to refer to the operating condition. Therefore, even when the variable member belonging to the second member group is defined in the regulation information, it is possible to suppress the useless processing of comparing each accessory with the operation condition from being executed. There is an effect that the processing load for varying the variable means can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, a display means for displaying a display effect and a display control means for controlling display contents to be displayed on the display means are provided, and the display control means uses the avoidance means to control the prescribed information. A game that is controllable to display on the display means an effect corresponding to the variable means for which the change is avoided when the change of the variable member specified in the above is avoided. Machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C6, the following effects are produced. That is, the display effect is displayed by the display means, and the display content displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means. When the avoidance means avoids the change of the variable member specified in the definition information, the display control means controls the display means to display an effect corresponding to the change means whose change is avoided.

  Thereby, even if the change of the variable member is avoided, it is possible to suppress an unnatural effect by displaying the corresponding effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the production.

<Feature D group> (Return processing at power-on is executed based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor)
A variable member that can be varied, a variable means that varies the variable member, a closing control means that controls the variable means so that the variable member performs a closing operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on, A discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the variable member is located within an operation start range, which is a predetermined operating range for starting the input operation; and when the power is turned on, the variable member is And a return operation executing means for executing a return operation for operating the variable means so as to be located within the operation start range when it is determined that the variable means is not located within the operation start range. Game machine D1.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is one that can execute a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable members (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation of the variable member due to diversification of the variable member.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the variable member that can be varied is varied by the variable means. The variable means is controlled by the input control means so that the variable member performs an input operation that is a predetermined operation based on the power-on. Whether or not the variable member is located within an operation start range that is a predetermined operation range for starting the closing operation is determined by the determination means. When the variable means is determined not to be in the operation start range when the power is turned on, the return operation for operating the variable means to be positioned in the operation start range is performed by the return operation execution means. Executed.

  As a result, since the variable means is operated within the operation start range by the return operation based on the power-on, the power-on operation can be suitably performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the accessory can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine D1, the return operation execution means is located within the operation start range from a position where it is determined that the variable member is not located within the operation start range based on the determination result by the determination means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the return operation is terminated when the position is changed to a position determined as “A”.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, based on the determination result by the determining means, the variable member is positioned within the motion start range from the position where it is determined that the variable member is not positioned within the motion start range. Since the return operation is terminated by the return operation execution means when it is changed to the position where it is determined that it is present, if it is not within the operation start range when the power is turned on, it is changed to the closest position in the operation start range The return operation can be terminated when the member is operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the return operation can be completed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine D2, the variable means can change the variable member bidirectionally between a first position and a second position different from the first position, A specific range determination for determining whether or not the variable member is located within a specific range of motion between a first position and a second position and including at least the first position. The operation start range is an operation range included in the specific operation range, and includes the end of the second position side in the specific operation range, and the return operation execution unit is When the variable member is determined to be located within the specific operation range by the specific range determining means, the variable member is moved to the second position side as the return operation, and the specific range determination is performed. Means for the specific operation range. Gaming machine D3 that when said variable member is judged to be not located, characterized in that said variable member as the return operation is intended to operate to the first position side within.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the variable member is variable in both directions between the first position and the second position different from the first position by the variable means. The specific range determining means determines whether or not the variable member is located within a specific operating range between the first position and the second position and including at least the first position. The The operation start range is included in the specific operation range, and the end of the second position side in the specific operation range is included in the operation start range. When it is determined that the variable member is located within the specific operation range by the specific range determining unit, the variable member is moved to the second position side by the return operation executing unit as the return operation. Further, when it is determined by the specific range determining means that the variable member is located within the specific operation range, the variable member is moved to the first position by the return operation executing means as the return operation.

  Thus, based on the determination result by the specific range determination means, it can be determined whether the operation start range is on the first position side or the second position side, so that the return operation is in the opposite direction to the operation start range. There is an effect that the variable member can be operated efficiently without operating the variable member.

  In the gaming machine D3, the operation start range is a terminal end on the second position side in the specific operation range.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the operation start range is the end of the second position side of the specific operation range, so the second position side as the closing operation executed by the return operation execution means It is only necessary to define the operation starting from the end of. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity for prescribing the input operation can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, an abnormality determining means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member when the insertion operation is performed, and determining that there is an abnormality by the abnormality determining means A gaming machine D5, comprising: a notification unit that executes a predetermined notification operation when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member when the closing operation is being performed is determined by the abnormality determination means, and when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality, a predetermined notification operation is notified. Executed by means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that abnormality can be eliminated based on the alerting | reporting by an alerting | reporting means.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the abnormality determining unit determines that the operation of the variable member is abnormal, the gaming machine D5 includes a specifying unit that specifies a type of the variable member having an operation abnormality. A gaming machine D6, which performs a notification operation corresponding to the type of the variable member specified by the specifying means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the abnormality determining unit determines that the operation of the variable member is abnormal, the type of the variable member having the abnormal operation is specified by the specifying unit. The notifying operation corresponding to the type of the variable member specified by the specifying means is executed by the notifying means.

  Thereby, since the type of the variable member can be easily recognized by the notification operation, there is an effect that the abnormality can be resolved more quickly.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the game machine includes a period determining unit that determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the return operation by the return operation executing unit is completed. A gaming machine D7, which controls the variable means so as to perform the making operation when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the period determining means whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the return operation by the return operation executing means is completed, and when the predetermined period has been determined by the period determining means, the making operation is performed. The variable means is controlled by the input control means.

  As a result, since the variable member can be kept in the operation start range for a predetermined period, when it is necessary to shut off the power supply in the state where the variable member is in the operation start range in shipping inspection or the like, The inspector can be turned off during this predetermined period. In other words, it is not necessary to wait until the closing operation is completed for each inspection or to manually operate the variable member until the inspector is within the operation start range after the power is turned off. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic E group> (Determines the timing of turning off the eyeball-shaped accessory based on the detection result of the sensor)
An effect display unit that can change the effect mode, and an opening / closing operation that is arranged on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the game board so that the effect display unit is exposed as it is opened. An opening / closing display means having a portion, an effect aspect setting means capable of setting at least the effect aspect to a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect, and an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing part. An opening / closing control means for controlling, and a position that can be taken by the opening / closing part between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing part and the complete closing of the opening / closing part, and a part of the effect display part from the opening / closing member Determining means for determining whether or not the specific opening position, which is an exposed position, is provided, and the effect mode setting means is configured to determine the determining means when the effect display unit is set to the first mode. The opening and closing part is in the specific open position Characterized in that the representation display section is for setting the second aspect based on being judged to have become the gaming machine E1.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means that operates with a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a risk that it is difficult to appropriately execute the effects in the variable means having a complicated configuration with the diversification of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, an effect display unit capable of changing the effect mode and an opening / closing operation that can be opened and closed with respect to the game board on the front side of the effect display unit, and the effect display unit is exposed as it is opened. The open / close display means is provided with an open / close section configured as described above. The production mode is set at least by the production mode setting means to the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing part is controlled by the opening / closing control means, and the opening / closing part can take a position from the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing part until it is completely closed. It is determined by the determining means whether or not the specific opening position, which is the position exposed from the above, is reached. When the effect display unit is set to the first mode, the effect display unit is set to the second mode by the effect mode setting unit based on the determination unit determining that the opening / closing unit has reached the specific opening position. Is set.

  Thereby, it can set to a 2nd aspect, before an opening-and-closing part is completely closed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

  In the gaming machine E1, the game machine E1 includes detection means for detecting whether or not the degree of opening of the opening / closing part is equal to or less than the degree of opening in the specific opening position, and the determination means is based on a detection result by the detection means. A gaming machine E2 characterized by determining whether or not a specific opening position has been reached.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, it is detected by the detecting means whether or not the opening degree of the opening / closing part is equal to or less than the opening degree in the specific opening position, and whether or not the specific opening position has been reached based on the detection result by the detecting means is determined by the determining means. Determined.

  Thereby, since the degree of opening can be determined only by the detection result of the detection result, the determination by the determination means can be further simplified. That is, when determining the degree of opening / closing of the opening / closing unit, there is no need to make a prediction according to the setting of the opening / closing operation such as the opening / closing speed and the elapsed time from the start of opening / closing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for discrimination by the discrimination means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect mode setting means sets the brightness of the effect display unit to a first luminance as the first mode, and the effect display as the second mode. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the brightness of the part is set to a second luminance that is darker than the first luminance.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are produced. That is, as the first aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to the first luminance by the effect mode setting means. Further, as a second aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to a second luminance that is darker than the first luminance by the effect mode setting means.

  Thereby, when closing an opening / closing part, it can be set to 2nd brightness | luminance darker than 1st brightness | luminance until it is completely closed after an opening / closing part becomes a specific open position. Therefore, the brightness of a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made inconspicuous, so that the appearance quality of the effect display unit can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E3, the second brightness is a state in which the effect display unit is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, the second luminance is a state in which the effect display unit is turned off. Therefore, when the opening / closing unit is closed, the opening / closing unit is completely opened. It is possible to make a part of the effect display part exposed from the opening / closing part less noticeable until it is closed. Therefore, there is an effect that the visual quality of the effect display unit can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the effect mode setting means determines that the opening / closing part is at the specific opening position by the determination means when the effect mode is set to the second mode. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the production mode is set to the first mode based on what is done.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the production mode is set to the second mode, it is determined by the determination unit that the opening / closing part has reached the specific opening position. Since the production mode is set to the first mode by the production mode setting means, the production mode can be switched at the same position in both cases of closing and opening the opening / closing part. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the opening / closing display means includes abnormality determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing portion, and the effect mode setting means has an abnormality determined by the abnormality determining means. A gaming machine E6, wherein when it is determined that the event has occurred, the effect mode is set to a third mode different from both the first mode and the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are produced. That is, in the open / close display means, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the open / close section is determined by the abnormality determination means. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determining means, the effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means to a third mode different from both the first mode and the second mode.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the hall clerk can easily determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing part depending on whether or not the production mode is set to the third mode.

  A gaming machine E7, comprising a plurality of the open / close display means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E6, since a plurality of opening / closing display means are provided, when an abnormality occurs in the opening / closing part of some opening / closing display means, the third mode is set. There is an effect that it is possible to easily specify the open / close display means having the open / close section where an abnormality has occurred, based on whether or not it is performed.

<Feature F group> (Peak current value is reduced by shifting the lighting timing of each LED)
A plurality of operation means, an operation control means for controlling the plurality of operation means based on the operation control data, and an operation control data for setting the operation control data for the corresponding operation means among the plurality of operation means. Setting means, wherein the operation control data setting means includes a plurality of states including at least a first operation state and a second operation state with lower power consumption than the first operation state. A plurality of states including at least a first operation control data controlled by the pattern, a third operation state and a fourth operation state having lower power consumption than the third operation state are controlled by the second operation pattern. Operation control data is set at least, and the operation control data setting means sets the first operation control data and the second operation control data for the plurality of operation means. Is set so that there is a period in which the first operation state performed in the first operation pattern does not overlap with the third operation state performed in the second operation pattern. A gaming machine F1 characterized by that.

  Here, some game machines such as a pachinko machine include a light-emitting member that performs a light-emitting operation and a production member such as a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can execute a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of performance members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a concern that the power consumption increases when the number of effects members is increased.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the operation of the plurality of operation means is controlled by the operation control means based on the operation control data. The operation control data is set by the operation control data setting unit for the corresponding operation unit among the plurality of operation units. In the operation means, a first operation control data in which a plurality of states including at least a first operation state and a second operation state with lower power consumption than the first operation state are controlled by the first operation pattern, and a third operation The operation control data setting means sets at least second operation control data in which a plurality of states including at least a state and a fourth operation state with lower power consumption than the third operation state are controlled by the second operation pattern. . When the first operation control data and the second control data are set for the plurality of operation means by the operation control data setting means, the first operation state performed in the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern It is set by the operation control data setting means so that there is a period in which the third operation state to be performed does not overlap.

  Thereby, power consumption can be suppressed in a period in which the first operating state and the third operating state are not overlapped. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption due to overlapping of periods during which the power consumption is high in each operation means.

  In the gaming machine F1, the operation control data setting means is performed in the first operation pattern when the first operation control data and the second operation control data are set for the plurality of operation means. The gaming machine F2 is set so that at least one of the first operation state and the third operation state performed in the second operation pattern are not overlapped.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first operation control data and the second operation control data are set by the operation control data setting means for the plurality of operation means, at least one operation state performed in the first operation pattern, The operation control data setting means sets the third operation state performed in the two operation patterns so as not to overlap.

  As a result, it is possible to disperse the period during which the operating means is controlled to operate in an operating state with high power consumption, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption consumed by the operating means. .

  The gaming machine F2 includes display means for displaying display information, and the operation control means includes backlight control means for controlling lighting of a backlight provided in the display means based on the operation control data, and electrical lighting Illumination control means for controlling lighting of the light source of the member based on the operation control data, and the operation control data setting means outputs the first operation control data to the backlight provided in the display means. A gaming machine F3, comprising: a backlight setting means for setting; and an illumination setting means for setting the second operation control data for the light source of the illumination member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. That is, display information is displayed on the display means. In the operation control means, lighting of the backlight provided in the display means is controlled by the backlight control means based on the operation control data. In addition, the lighting of the light source of the electric decoration member is controlled by the electric decoration control means based on the operation control data.

  Thereby, the period which makes it light so that a lighting period may not overlap with the light source of a backlight and an electrical decoration member can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption during the overlapping period due to overlapping of the lighting periods in the period.

  In the gaming machine F3, the first operation pattern is an operation pattern in which the lighting state and the light-off state are repeated in the first cycle, and the second operation pattern is the light-on state and the light-off in the second cycle. The operation control data setting means prevents the lighting state performed in the first operation pattern from overlapping the lighting state performed in the second operation pattern. A gaming machine F4, which is characterized in that it is set to

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first operation pattern, the lighting state and the extinguishing state are repeated in the first cycle. In the second operation pattern, the lighting state and the extinguishing state are repeated in the second cycle. Control is performed so that the lighting state performed in the first operation pattern and the lighting state performed in the second operation pattern do not overlap.

  Thereby, among one of a backlight and an electrical decoration member, the other can be made into a light extinction state in the lighting state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more effectively suppress both the backlight and the electric decoration member from being turned on and increasing power consumption.

  The gaming machine F4 includes effect control means for controlling execution of various effects of the gaming machine, and display control means for controlling display effects executed on the display means based on commands output from the effect control means. The display control means includes the backlight control means, the backlight setting means, a synchronization signal generating means for generating a synchronization signal every predetermined period, and an output means for outputting the synchronization signal to the effect control means. And the backlight control means controls the backlight to operate in the first operation pattern based on the synchronization signal when the first operation control data is set by the backlight setting means. The effect control means includes the electric decoration control means and the electric decoration setting means, and the electric decoration control means is the electric decoration setting hand. When the second operation control data is set by the game machine F5, the light source of the electric decoration member is controlled to operate in the second operation pattern based on the synchronization signal. .

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are produced. That is, execution of various effects of the gaming machine is controlled by the effect control means. A display effect executed in the display means based on a command output from the effect control means is controlled by the display control means. The display control means includes a backlight control means and a backlight setting means. Further, a synchronization signal is generated every predetermined period by the synchronization signal generation means, and the synchronization signal is output to the effect control means by the output means. When the first operation control data is set by the backlight setting unit, the backlight control unit controls the backlight to operate in the first operation pattern based on the synchronization signal. In the effect control means, an electric decoration control means and an electric decoration setting means are included in the configuration. When the second operation control data is set by the illumination setting unit, the illumination control unit controls the light source of the illumination member to operate in the second operation pattern based on the synchronization signal.

  Thereby, since the period of a lighting state and the period of a light extinction state can be set based on the same synchronizing signal with respect to the light source of a backlight and an illumination member, with the light source of a backlight and an illumination member There is an effect that the overlapping of the periods of the lighting state can be more reliably suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F5, the synchronization signal generation unit generates the synchronization signal in accordance with a cycle of updating the display content of the display unit, and the display control unit is configured to display the display unit based on the synchronization signal. The game machine F6 is provided with display update means for updating the display content of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the synchronization signal is generated by the synchronization signal generation unit in accordance with the cycle of updating the display content of the display unit. In the display control means, the display content of the display means is updated by the display update means based on the synchronization signal.

  As a result, the synchronization signal necessary for updating the display on the display means can be used as the synchronization signal for the lighting control by the backlight control means and the illumination control means, so the number of synchronization signals can be reduced. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the first operating pattern is characterized in that a period of the unlit state is shorter than a period of the lighting state.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the first operation pattern operates in the first operation pattern because the period in the unlit state is shorter than the period in the lighting state. The brightness of the backlight can be improved. That is, while the timing at which the backlight is turned on overlaps with the timing at which the light source of the illumination member is turned on, the drive current supplied to the light emitting means is suppressed from increasing instantaneously. There is an effect that the appearance quality of the display means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the second operation pattern is lit after a predetermined delay period has elapsed since the lighting state of the backlight operated in the first operation pattern has ended. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, in the second operation pattern, a predetermined delay period elapses after the lighting state of the backlight that operates in the first operation pattern ends. Since the lighting is performed after the backlight is turned off, the backlight should be turned off completely during the delay period even if there is a time lag after the backlight is turned off after the backlight is turned off. Can do. Therefore, there exists an effect that it can suppress more reliably that power consumption increases because the lighting state of a backlight and the lighting state of an electrical decoration member overlap.

<Characteristic G group> (Subdivides an accessory into a plurality of groups and controls the accessory motor so that each group does not interfere)
A plurality of variable members that are variable, and variable control means that controls the variable members to be variable in units of variable member groups constituted by one or a plurality of the variable members. A first member group and a second member group different from the first member group are provided, and at least one of the variable members constituting the first member group, and the second member group The at least one variable member that is configured is in a positional relationship of interfering with each other by being varied, and the variable control means configures the variable member group according to operating conditions determined for each of the variable member groups A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising means for variably controlling the variable member.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are those that include a combination that operates with a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of actors (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  According to the gaming machine G1, a plurality of variable members that can be varied are controlled by the variable control means so as to be varied in units of one or a plurality of variable member groups. As the variable member group, at least a first member group and a second member group different from the first member group are provided. The at least one variable member that constitutes the first member group and the at least one variable member that constitutes the second member group are in a positional relationship of interfering with each other by being varied. Means for variably controlling the variable members constituting the variable member group according to the operating conditions determined for each variable member group is provided in the variable control means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that each variable member group can be operated suitably based on operation conditions.

  In the gaming machine G1, the operation condition includes the second member group when the variable members constituting the first member group are in positions that do not interfere even if the second member group is varied. A gaming machine G2 that includes a variable condition.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the operating conditions include when the variable members constituting the first member group are in positions that do not interfere even if the second member group is varied. Since the condition for making the second member group variable is included, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the objects from interfering with each other.

  In the gaming machine G2, the variable control means variably controls the variable member so that the variable member performs a turning-on operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that it includes an operating condition of a closing operation.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable member is variably controlled by the variable control means so that the variable member performs a turning-on operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on. The operating condition includes the operating condition of the making operation.

  Thereby, according to the operation condition, there is an effect that the making operation can be executed without interference between the variable members.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a pointer means whose value is updated as time elapses, and a rule that defines the operation content of the variable means in association with the value of the pointer means for each variable member group A regulation information storage means for storing information, and the variable control means control so as to vary the corresponding variable member group based on the regulation information corresponding to the pointer means. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, the value of the pointer means is updated as time elapses, and the regulation information storing the regulation content for each variable member group is stored in the regulation information storage means in association with the value of the pointer means. Control is performed by the variable control means so as to vary the corresponding variable member group based on the defining information corresponding to the pointer means.

  Thereby, the operation of the variable means can be set by a simple control of setting the operation according to the contents of the prescribed information specified by the value of the pointer means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for control of the variable control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines G3 and G4, an information discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the prescribed information corresponding to the pointer unit is predetermined information, and the information discriminating unit corresponds to the pointer unit during execution of the throwing operation. An gaming machine G5, comprising: an operation ending means for ending the throw-in operation when it is determined that the prescribed information is the predetermined information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G3 and G4, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the information determining means whether or not the defining information corresponding to the pointer means is predetermined information, and the defining information corresponding to the pointer means is the predetermined information during execution of the making operation by the information determining means. Is determined, the closing operation is ended by the operation ending means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the closing operation can be more easily completed without determining the elapsed time from the start of the closing operation, the operation status of the variable means, and the like.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, a determination unit that determines whether or not the insertion operation has been successfully executed, and a notification operation when the determination unit determines that the insertion operation has not been executed normally. A gaming machine G6 comprising a notification means to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the determining means whether or not the making operation has been normally executed, and when it is determined by the determining means that the making operation has not been executed normally, the notifying operation is executed by the notifying means.

  As a result, when an abnormality has occurred in the variable means, the clerk in the hall can be made aware of the occurrence of the abnormality at the time of the loading operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the abnormality can be quickly resolved based on the notification operation.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the gaming machines A1-A8, B1-B11, C1-C6, D1-D7, E1-E7, F1-F8, G1-G6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation of the variable member due to diversification of the variable member.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting the operation of the variable member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a variable member that can be changed, a variable means that changes the variable member, and an input in which the variable member has a predetermined operation based on power-on. A closing control means for controlling the variable means so as to perform an operation, and a determining means for determining whether or not the variable member is located within an operation start range that is a predetermined operating range for starting the closing operation. And when the power source is turned on and the determination means determines that the variable member is not located within the operation start range, the variable means is operated so as to be located within the operation start range. Return operation executing means for executing the operation.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the return operation execution unit determines that the variable member is not located within the operation start range based on a determination result by the determination unit. The return operation is terminated when the position is changed from a position to be determined to be within the operation start range.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the variable means places the variable member between a first position and a second position different from the first position. Can be varied in both directions, and is a predetermined operating range from the first position to the second position, and within the specific operating range including at least the first position. Specific range determining means for determining whether or not the variable member is positioned, wherein the operation start range is an operation range included in the specific operation range, and the second position in the specific operation range The return operation executing means is configured to return the variable member as the return action when the specific range determination means determines that the variable member is located within the specific operation range. To the second position side, When the variable member in said particular operating range is judged not to be located by serial specific range determining means is the variable member as the return operation which is operated to the first position side.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the variable member that can be changed is changed by the variable means. The variable means is controlled by the input control means so that the variable member performs an input operation that is a predetermined operation based on the power-on. Whether or not the variable member is located within an operation start range that is a predetermined operation range for starting the closing operation is determined by the determination means. When the variable means is determined not to be in the operation start range when the power is turned on, the return operation for operating the variable means to be positioned in the operation start range is performed by the return operation execution means. Executed.
As a result, since the variable means is operated within the operation start range by the return operation based on the power-on, the power-on operation can be suitably performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the accessory can be suitably set.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the variable member is changed from a position where it is determined that the variable member is not located within the operation start range to a position where it is determined that the variable member is located within the operation start range, the return operation is performed. The return operation is terminated by the execution means.
As a result, when the variable member is moved to the nearest position in the operation start range when the power is turned on, the return operation can be ended when the variable member is operated at the closest position in the operation start range. Therefore, there is an effect that the return operation can be completed in a shorter time.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects can be achieved. In other words, the variable member is bidirectionally changed between the first position and the second position different from the first position by the variable means. The specific range determining means determines whether or not the variable member is located within a specific operating range between the first position and the second position and including at least the first position. The The operation start range is included in the specific operation range, and the end of the second position side in the specific operation range is included in the operation start range. When it is determined that the variable member is located within the specific operation range by the specific range determining unit, the variable member is moved to the second position side by the return operation executing unit as the return operation. Further, when it is determined by the specific range determining means that the variable member is located within the specific operation range, the variable member is moved to the first position by the return operation executing means as the return operation.
Thus, based on the determination result by the specific range determination means, it can be determined whether the operation start range is on the first position side or the second position side, so that the return operation is in the opposite direction to the operation start range. There is an effect that the variable member can be operated efficiently without operating the variable member.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
229 Motor for accessory (variable means)
912a, 912b Opening / closing part (part of variable member)
916 Shading sensor (specific range discriminating means)
S1230 Return operation execution means S1402 Part of the input control means
S4103, S4106 portion of the first variable control means
S4401 discrimination means
S4402-S4404 third variable control means S4407, S4411 discrimination means, specific range discrimination means
S4409 to S4411 second variable control means

Claims (2)

A variable member that is variable;
Variable means for changing the variable member;
First variable control means for variably controlling the variable means so that the variable member performs a predetermined input operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on;
Determining means capable of determining the position of the variable member;
Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means at the time of power-on is a discrimination result corresponding to a position not included in a predetermined specific range, the variable is performed before performing the predetermined power-on operation. Second variable control means for varying the variable means to the specific range by variably controlling the variable means in a direction in which the member moves toward the specific range ;
Based on the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the position included in the specific range at the time of power-on, the variable member is identified by the specific member before performing the predetermined power-on operation. A gaming machine, comprising: third variable control means for variably controlling the variable means in a direction toward the outside of the range to change the position to a predetermined position within the specific range .   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the variable member is configured to be visible to a player.

Images